WO2008079404A2 - Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders - Google Patents
Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2008079404A2 WO2008079404A2 PCT/US2007/026336 US2007026336W WO2008079404A2 WO 2008079404 A2 WO2008079404 A2 WO 2008079404A2 US 2007026336 W US2007026336 W US 2007026336W WO 2008079404 A2 WO2008079404 A2 WO 2008079404A2
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- pharmaceutical composition
- bioadhesive
- levodopa
- release
- certain embodiments
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 CC(Cc(cc1O*)ccc1O*)(C(OC(*)(OC(*)=O)I*)=O)NN* Chemical compound CC(Cc(cc1O*)ccc1O*)(C(OC(*)(OC(*)=O)I*)=O)NN* 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/20—Pills, tablets, discs, rods
- A61K9/2004—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
- A61K9/2022—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/2031—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, polyethylene oxide, poloxamers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
- A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
- A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
- A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
- A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
- A61K31/197—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group the amino and the carboxyl groups being attached to the same acyclic carbon chain, e.g. gamma-aminobutyric acid [GABA], beta-alanine, epsilon-aminocaproic acid, pantothenic acid
- A61K31/198—Alpha-aminoacids, e.g. alanine, edetic acids [EDTA]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
- A61K9/0053—Mouth and digestive tract, i.e. intraoral and peroral administration
- A61K9/0065—Forms with gastric retention, e.g. floating on gastric juice, adhering to gastric mucosa, expanding to prevent passage through the pylorus
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/20—Pills, tablets, discs, rods
- A61K9/2004—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
- A61K9/2022—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/2031—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, polyethylene oxide, poloxamers
- A61K9/204—Polyesters, e.g. poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/20—Pills, tablets, discs, rods
- A61K9/2072—Pills, tablets, discs, rods characterised by shape, structure or size; Tablets with holes, special break lines or identification marks; Partially coated tablets; Disintegrating flat shaped forms
- A61K9/2086—Layered tablets, e.g. bilayer tablets; Tablets of the type inert core-active coat
- A61K9/209—Layered tablets, e.g. bilayer tablets; Tablets of the type inert core-active coat containing drug in at least two layers or in the core and in at least one outer layer
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/20—Pills, tablets, discs, rods
- A61K9/28—Dragees; Coated pills or tablets, e.g. with film or compression coating
- A61K9/2806—Coating materials
- A61K9/2833—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/2853—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, polyethylene oxide, poloxamers, poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/48—Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
- A61K9/50—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals
- A61K9/5005—Wall or coating material
- A61K9/5021—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/5026—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyvinyl pyrrolidone, poly(meth)acrylates
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/48—Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
- A61K9/50—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals
- A61K9/5005—Wall or coating material
- A61K9/5021—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/5031—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
- A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/48—Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
- A61K9/50—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals
- A61K9/5073—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals having two or more different coatings optionally including drug-containing subcoatings
Definitions
- a movement disorder is a neurological disturbance that involves one or more muscles or muscle groups. Movement disorders affect a significant portion of the population, causing disability as well as distress. Movement disorders include Parkinson's disease, Huntingdon's chorea, progressive supranuclear palsy, Wilson's disease, Tourette's syndrome, epilepsy, tardive dyskinesia, and various chronic tremors, tics and dystonias. Different clinically observed movement disorders can be traced to the same or similar areas of the brain. For example, abnormalities of basal ganglia (a large cluster of cells deep in the hemispheres of the brain) are postulated as a causative factor in diverse movement disorders.
- basal ganglia a large cluster of cells deep in the hemispheres of the brain
- Parkinson's disease is a movement disorder of increasing occurrence in aging populations. It is a progressive neurodegenerative disorder affecting the mobility and control of the skeletal muscular system. The disease is associated with the depletion of dopamine from cells in the corpus striatum. Parkinson's disease is a common disabling disease of old age affecting about one percent of the population over the age of 60 in the United States. The incidence of Parkinson's disease increases with age and the cumulative lifetime risk of an individual developing the disease is about 1 in 40. Symptoms include pronounced tremor of the extremities, bradykinesia, rigidity and postural change.
- Parkinson's disease A perceived pathophysiological cause of Parkinson's disease is progressive destruction of dopamine-producing cells in the basal ganglia which comprise the pars compartum of the substantia nigra, basal nuclei located in the brain stem. Loss of dopamineric neurons results in a relative excess of acetylcholine. See Jellinger, Post Mortem Studies in Parkinson's Disease - Is It Possible to Detect Brain Areas For Specific Symptoms? J. Neural. Transm. 56(Supp): 1-29:1999. Parkinson's disease often begins with mild limb stiffness and infrequent tremors and progresses over a period of ten or more years to frequent tremors and memory impairment, to uncontrollable tremors and dementia.
- Tardive Dyskinesia is a chronic disorder of the nervous system, characterized by involuntary, irregular rhythmic movements of the mouth, tongue, and facial muscles. The upper extremities also may be involved. These movements may be accompanied, to a variable extent, by other involuntary movements and movement disorders. These include rocking, writhing, or twisting movements of the trunk (tardive dystonia), forcible eye closure (tardive blepharospasm), an irresistible impulse to move continually (tardive akathisia), jerking movements of the neck (tardive spasmodic torticollis), and disrupted respiratory movements (respiratory dyskinesia).
- TD TD cases are caused by the prolonged use of antipsychotic drugs (neuroleptics).
- a relatively small number are caused by the use of other medications, such as metoclopramide, that, like neuroleptics, block dopamine receptors.
- TD often manifests or worsens in severity after neuroleptic drug therapy is discontinued. Resumption of neuroleptic therapy will temporarily suppress the involuntary movements, but may aggravate them in the long run.
- TD affects approximately 15-20% of patients treated with neuroleptic drugs (Khot et al., Neuroleptics and Classic Tardive Dyskinesia, in Lang AE, Weiner WJ (eds.): Drug Induced Movement Disorders, Futura Publishing Co., 1992, pp 121-166). Therefore, the condition affects hundreds of thousands of people in the United States alone. The cumulative incidence of TD is substantially higher in women, in older people, and in those being treated with neuroleptics for conditions other than schizophrenia, such as bipolar disorder (manic- depressive illness) (see, e.g., Hayashi et al., Clin. Neuropharmacol. 19: 390, 1996; Jeste et al., Arch. Gen. Psychiatry 52: 756, 1995). Unlike the acute motor side effects of neuroleptic drugs, TD does not respond in general to antiparkinson drugs (Decker et al., New Eng. J Med. Oct. 7, p. 861, 1971).
- Focal Dystonias are a class of related movement disorders involving the intermittent sustained contraction of a group of muscles.
- the prevalence of focal dystonias in one US county was estimated as 287 per million (Monroe County Study); this suggests that at least 70,000 people are affected in the US alone.
- the spasms of focal dystonia can last many seconds at a time, causing major disruption of the function of the affected area.
- Some of the focal dystonias are precipitated by repetitive movements; writer's cramp is the best known example.
- Focal dystonia can involve the face (e.g. , blepharospasm, mandibular dystonia), the neck (torticollis), the limbs (e.g., writer's cramp), or the trunk.
- Dystonia can occur spontaneously or can be precipitated by exposure to neuroleptic drugs and other dopamine receptor blockers (tardive dystonia). No systemic drug therapy is generally effective, but some drugs give partial relief to some patients. Those most often prescribed are anticholinergics, baclofen, benzodiazepines, and dopamine agonists and antagonists. The most consistently effective treatment is the injection of botulinum toxin into affected muscles.
- a tic is an abrupt repetitive movement, gesture, or utterance that often mimics a normal type of behavior.
- Motor tics include movements such as eye blinking, head jerks or shoulder shrugs, but can vary to more complex purposive-appearing behaviors such as facial expressions of emotion or meaningful gestures of the arms and head.
- the movement can be obscene (copropraxia) or self-injurious.
- Phonic or vocal tics range from throat clearing sounds to complex vocalizations and speech, sometimes with coprolalia (obscene speech) (Leckman et al., supra).
- Tics are irregular in time, though consistent regarding the muscle groups involved. Characteristically, they can be suppressed for a short time by voluntary effort.
- Tics are estimated to affect 1% to 13% of boys and 1% to 11% of girls, the male- female ratio being less than 2 to 1. Approximately 5% of children between the ages of 7 and 1 1 years are affected with tic behavior (Leckman et al., Neuropsychiatry of the Bas. Gang 20(4): 839-861, 1997). The estimated prevalence of multiple tics with vocalization, e.g., Tourette's syndrome, varies among different reports, ranging from 5 per 10,000 to 5 per 1,000.
- Gilles de Ia Tourette syndrome is the most severe tic disorder. Tourette's syndrome is 3-4 times more common in boys than girls and 10 times more common in children and adolescents than in adults (Leckman et al, Neuropsychiatry of the Bas. Gang 20(4): 839-861, 1997; Esper et al., Term. Med. 90: 18-20, 1997). Patients with TS have multiple tics, including at least one vocal (phonic) tic. TS becomes apparent in early childhood with the presentation of simple motor tics, for example, eye blinking or head jerks. Initially, tics may come and go, but in time tics become persistent and severe, and begin to have adverse effects on the child and the child's family.
- Phonic tics manifest, on average, 1 to 2 years after the onset of motor tics. By the age of 10, most children have developed an awareness of the premonitory urges that frequently precede a tic. Such premonitions may enable the individual to voluntary suppress the tic, yet premonition unfortunately adds to the discomfort associated with having the disorder. By late adolescence/early adulthood, tic disorders can improve significantly in certain individuals. However, adults who continue to suffer from tics often have particularly severe and debilitating symptoms. (Leckman et al., Neuropsychiatry of the Bas. Gang 20(4): 839-861, 1997).
- Parkinson's disease is associated with the depletion of dopamine from cells in the corpus striatum. Since dopamine can't cross the blood brain barrier (BBB), it is ineffective in the treatment of Parkinson's disease.
- BBB blood brain barrier
- Levodopa a metabolic precursor of dopamine, readily crosses the BBB, and is metabolically transformed to dopamine by the aromatic L-amino acid decarboxylase enzyme. This enzyme is found throughout the body including gastric juices and the mucosa of the intestine.
- levodopa alone requires administration of large doses of the drug due to extracerebral metabolism by this enzyme. The resulting high concentration of extracerebral dopamine causes nausea in some patients.
- levodopa is usually administered with an inhibitor of the aromatic L-amino acid decarboxylase enzyme such as carbidopa, which cannot itself cross the blood brain barrier and has no effect on the metabolism of levodopa in the brain.
- the levodopa / carbidopa therapy is considered to be the most effective treatment for symptoms of Parkinson's disease ⁇ The Medical Letter 35: 31-34, 1993). Nevertheless, certain limitations become apparent within two to five years of initiating combination therapy. As the disease progresses, the benefit from each dose becomes shorter ("the wearing off effect”), and some patients fluctuate unpredictably between mobility and immobility (“the on-off effect”).
- On periods are usually associated with high plasma levodopa concentrations and often include abnormal involuntary movements, i.e., dyskinesias. "Off periods have been correlated with low plasma levodopa and bradykinetic episodes.
- a second problem for the multiple dose regimen is that the "peak and trough" blood levels produced by multiple daily doses result in fluctuating stimulation of the dopaminergic neurons. These fluctuations may contribute to the pathogenesis of the motor complications in Parkinson disease.
- adverse effects associated with MIRAP EX ® include nausea, vomiting / emesis, weakness, dizziness, fainting, agitation, confusion, hallucinations, muscle twitching, uncontrollable movements, a tingling sensation, chest pain, insomnia, somnolence, decreased appetite, dry mouth, sweating, headache, constipation and gastric intestinal complications.
- the present invention is directed to dosage forms that allow drug to be released in a highly controlled, time-dependent manner.
- any of the subject dosage forms and/or delivery devices may be used to deliver any of a large spectrum of compounds (e.g., drugs, prodrugs, metabolic precursors, etc.), especially those with limited absorption windows in upper GI (e.g., stomach).
- compounds e.g., drugs, prodrugs, metabolic precursors, etc.
- upper GI e.g., stomach
- An exemplary list of compounds that can be delivered using the subject dosage forms and/or delivery devices includes, but not limited to: metformin, acyclovir, ranitidine, riboflavin, chlorthiazide, gabapentin, losartin potassium, ganciclovir, cimetidine, minocycline, fexofenadine, bupropion, orlistat, captopril, diphenhydramine, tripelennamine, chlorpheniramine maleate, promethazine, omeprazole, prostaglandin, carbenoxolane, sucralphate, isosorbide, quinidine, enalapril, nifedipine, verapamil, diltiazem, nadolol, timolol, pindolol, salbutamol, terbutaline, carbuterol, broxaterol, aminophylline, cyclizine, cinnarizine, domperidone, aliza
- One aspect of the invention relates in general to any drug that may be used to treat Parkinson's disease (or other movement disorders), especially levodopa / carbidopa therapy using the subject dosage forms and delivery devices.
- the drugs or prodrugs are released at a rate that results in reduction in the frequency or severity of at least one adverse effect associated with levodopa / carbidopa therapy.
- the dosage form releases levodopa and carbidopa at a rate that results in reduction in the frequency or severity of at least one adverse event associated with current levodopa / carbidopa therapies, or allows for a more convenient dosing regimen than current therapies.
- the effective composition may include drug and/or prodrug.
- any drug may be replaced in whole or in part by its prodrug(s), metabolic precursor(s), or analog(s) that provides the same therapeutic effect.
- one aspect of the invention provides a single dosage formulation of a pharmaceutical composition for treatment of a movement disorder.
- the single dosage formulation comprises levodopa and/or a metabolic precursor thereof, and optionally a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, wherein the dosage formulation produces and maintains a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa thereof over a period of at least about 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, 12 hours, 14 hours, 16 hours, 18 hours, 20 hours or more.
- the pharmaceutical composition comprises: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient within about 2 hours of administration to the patient (e.g., less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min.
- IR immediate-release
- a second substantially zero order release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient; wherein at least the first IR portion further comprises a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, and the ratio of the inhibitor to levodopa or the precursor in at least the first IR portion is greater than 1 :4.
- the first immediate-release (IR) portion reaches half- maximum dissolution (e.g., when 50% of the effective composition is released) within about 1 hour, 30 minutes, 15 minutes, 10 minutes, or 5 minutes or less.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (3) a substantially ascending release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (4) a substantially elevating release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to elevate the substantially zero-order release rate to a higher level beginning around a predetermined time point, such as about 3-7, 4-7, or 4-6 hours after administration to the patient.
- a substantially elevating release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to elevate the substantially zero-order release rate to a higher level beginning around a predetermined time point, such as about 3-7, 4-7, or 4-6 hours after administration to the patient.
- the substantially elevating release portion is optionally formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration. This may be effected by, for example, using a similar second immediate-release portion described above.
- the substantially elevating release portion comprises a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- the substantially elevating release portion comprises levodopa or the precursor.
- substantially ascending release portion is an optional portion of the subject single dosage formulation pharmaceutical composition, which release profile resembles a peak, e.g., having sloping ascending and descending slopes with substantially no intervening plateau at which the release is maintained at a substantially constant rate.
- the ascending and descending slopes of the peak may be, but need not be asymmetrical.
- the ascending slope may be quite steep, e.g., the substantially ascending release portion may be a second immediate release portion, e.g., as a delayed-release immediate release portion.
- the substantially ascending release portion may adopt a substantially milder ascending slope than that of the first immediate release portion, e.g., as a delayed-release controlled-release portion.
- substantially elevating release portion is an optional portion of the subject single dosage formulation pharmaceutical composition, which release profile resembles a plateau, e.g., having an ascending slope, a relatively flat plateau, and a descending slope.
- the plateau is “elevated,” in that the relative constant level of levodopa is higher than the previous substantially zero-order release rate.
- the ascending and descending slopes of the peak may be, but need not be, asymmetrical.
- the ascending slope may be quite steep, e.g., the substantially ascending release portion may be a second immediate release portion, e.g., as a delayed-release immediate release potion.
- the substantially ascending release portion may adopt a substantially milder ascending slope than that of the first immediate release portion, e.g., as a delayed- release controlled-release portion.
- rapid refers to a time period no more than about 3 hours, 2 hours, 1.5 hours, 1 hour, 30 minutes, 20 minutes, 15 minutes, 10 minutes, 5 minutes, or less.
- the various portions of the composition may include multiple drugs, such as carbidopa and levodopa, and their respective prodrugs.
- the relative proportions of the different drugs or prodrugs may vary at boundaries between the various portions (i.e., different portions may have uniform drug ratios that differ from neighboring components), or may be formulated to change gradually over one or more portions of the composition.
- the ratio of drug to prodrug may vary, depending on one or more factors such as relative solubility or other pharmacokinetic properties (e.g., absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion, etc.).
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient within about 2 hours of administration to the patient; (2) a second substantially zero order release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient; and (3) a substantially ascending release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period.
- IR immediate-release
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient within about 2 hours of administration to the patient; (2) a second substantially zero order release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient; and (3) a substantially elevating release portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to elevate the substantially zero-order release rate to a higher level beginning at a predetermined time point.
- IR immediate-release
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a sleep-inducing agent; and, (2) a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration at a predetermined time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient.
- the sleep-inducing agent is benzodiazepine (e.g., LIBRIUM ® , VALIUM ® ), a prescription sleeping aid medicine (e.g., AMBIEN ® , RESTORIL ® , DESYREL ® , and SONATA ® ), eszopiclone (e.g., LUNESTATM), or a non-prescription (over- the-counter) sleeping aid medicine (e.g., TYLENOL ® PM, EXCEDRIN PM ® , UNISOM ® / NYTOL ® / SLEEPINAL ® ).
- a prescription sleeping aid medicine e.g., AMBIEN ® , RESTORIL ® , DESYREL ® , and SONATA ®
- eszopiclone e.g., LUNESTATM
- a non-prescription (over- the-counter) sleeping aid medicine e.g., TY
- the pharmaceutical composition is for administration to a patient before sleeping.
- the pharmaceutical composition is for administration to a patient before sleeping, and the beginning of the delayed immediate release is calculated to begin just prior to the waking of the patient.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (3) a first delayed immediate-release (DIR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient within about 2 hours of the predetermined time.
- DIR delayed immediate-release
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (4) a second delayed controlled release (DCR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period after the predetermined time, to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient.
- DCR delayed controlled release
- the predetermined time after administration is 6 to 9 hours after administration.
- the rapid drop of levodopa takes place in less than two hours.
- the formulation further comprises one or more of a dopamine precursor, such as L-dopa; a dopaminergic agent, such as Levodopa-carbidopa (SINEMET ® , SINEMET CR ® ) or Levodopa-benserazide (PROLOP A ® , MADOP AR ® , MADOPAR HBS ® ); a dopaminergic and anti-cholinergic agent, such as amantadine (SYMMETRYL ® , SYMAD INE ® ); an anti-cholinergic agent, such as trihexyphenidyl (ARTANE ® ), benztropine (COGENTIN ® ), ethoproprazine (PARSITAN ® ), or procyclidine (KEMADRIN ® ); a dopamine agonist, such as apomorphine, bromocriptine (PARLODEL ® ), cabergoline (DOSTINEX
- the stool softener(s) may be separately administered.
- the stool softener(s) may be administered at a time when the effective compositions of first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, or the substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) are being released.
- a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder comprising: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient in less than about 2 hours of administration to the patient; and, (2) a second substantially zero order release portion comprising levodopa or the precursor, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient; wherein at least the first IR portion further comprises a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, and the ratio of the inhibitor to levodopa or the precursor in at least the first IR portion is greater than 1 :4.
- IR immediate-release
- the ratio of the decarboxylase inhibitor to levodopa or its precursor in the first IR portion is about 1 :3, 1 :2, 1 : 1 , 2: 1 , 3: 1 , 4: 1 , 5: 1 , or greater.
- the ratio may be different in different portions or sub-portions.
- two or more sub-portions may be present, each having a different inhibitor / levodopa ratio.
- the ratio for the sub-portions to be released first (earlier) may be higher than that for the sub-portions to be released last (later).
- the carbidopa and levodopa compositions may be released at different rates from different portions or sub-portions.
- the carbidopa / levodopa ratio may be consistently 1 :4 in all subportions of the second substantially zero order release portion, the earlier sub-portions may release carbidopa faster, such that the release carbidopa / levodopa ratio is more than 1 :4.
- release ratio is defined as the ratio of two substances (e.g., carbidopa and levodopa) released at a given time point.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (3) a substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) comprising levodopa or the precursor, formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period.
- a substantially ascending release portion such as the second IR portion
- levodopa or the precursor formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period.
- the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient within about 2 hours of administration to the patient; (2) a second substantially zero order release portion comprising levodopa or the precursor, formulated to release levodopa or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or the precursor in the patient; and (3) a substantially ascending release portion comprising levodopa or the precursor, formulated to effect a rapid drop of levodopa concentration in the patient to below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period.
- IR immediate-release
- the levodopa concentration in the patient drops below the therapeutically effective concentration at the end of the treatment period within about 2 hours, e.g., within about 45 minutes, 1 hour, 1.5 hours, or 2 hours after the start of the substantially ascending release portion.
- the levodopa precursor may be a methyl, ethyl, or propyl ester of levodopa, or a combination thereof.
- the levodopa precursor may be (-)-L- ⁇ -amino- ⁇ -(3,4-dihydroxybenzene) propanoic acid, 3 -hydroxy- L-tyrosine ethyl ester, phenylglycine, or a mixture thereof.
- the ratio of the decarboxylase inhibitor to levodopa or the precursor in the first IR portion is about 1 :3 or greater.
- one or more of the various portions may comprise one or more additional drugs, such as the ones listed above.
- the release ratio of the decarboxylase inhibitor to levodopa and/or its precursor varies between the start and the end of dispensing the second substantially zero order release portion.
- the ratio changes substantially continuously over the release period of the second substantially zero order release portion.
- the ratio is substantially constant during all or a part of the release period of the second substantially zero order release portion.
- the substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) comprises a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- the ratio of the inhibitor to levodopa and/or the precursor in the second IR portion is less than 1 :4, such as 1 :6, 1 :8, 1 :10, 1 :15, 1 :20, or less.
- decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is carbidopa, a carbidopa prodrug, benserazide, methylphenidate, or a combination thereof.
- carbidopa and benserazide are not pharmacologically / pharmaco- dynamically active, and they both have excellent toxicological profiles.
- the total dose of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor per day per human patient is in the range of about 75 - 600 mg, or in the range of about 100 - 500 mg, or in the range of about 100 — 400 mg.
- the total dose of levodopa and/or metabolic precursor thereof per day per human patient is between about 50 mg and about 300 mg.
- At least one of the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) further comprises at least one dopamine transport inhibitor, preferably in sufficient amount to decrease dopamine elimination.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is methylphenidate.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is present in an amount of about 3 mg to about 60 mg.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is released starting after a delay of about 2 hours to about 7 hours.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is released over a period of time of about 1 hour to about 6 hours.
- the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion are formulated to provide a sustained dose over at least 4 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 16 hours, 20 hours, or 24 hours when administered to the patient.
- the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion are formulated into a stack of compressed inserts encased inside a shell or coating, each portion having an independent dissolution profile, wherein drug is released only from an exposed surface at a predetermined face of the stack, e.g. , through an opening at one end of the shell (e.g., the multilayered tablet).
- some or all of the beads are coated by a dispersion-promoting coating, e.g., exterior to a bioadhesive coating.
- the beads are less than about 1 mm in diameter.
- the beads are dispersed in a matrix that disintegrates in less than about 5 minutes, 4 min., 3 min., 2 min., or less than 1 min.
- the beads are dispersed in an eroding tablet that gradually erodes over the treatment period.
- the tablet is at least partially coated by a bioadhesive material and/or an immediate release portion.
- the bioadhesive material if present, is exposed upon dissolution of the immediate release portion.
- the shell is fully or partially coated by a bioadhesive polymeric material.
- the composition contains no bioadhesive material, although other inert compositions, such as those found in the insert backing layer(s) of certain tablets (e.g., ethylcellulose (ETHOCELTM Std. 10 or 20 Premium), methylcellulose (METHOCELTM Kl 00M), magnesium stearate, etc.) may be present, e.g., in place of the bioadhesive materials decribed for a particular embodiment.
- ETHOCELTM Std. 10 or 20 Premium methylcellulose
- ME stearate magnesium stearate
- Such inert compositions may be chosen to be substantially insoluble in water, substantially impermeable to passage of biological fluids and/or the active agent(s), non-porous, and/or substantially non-swelling (e.g., the volume of the material increases by less than 25%, preferably less than 10%, when placed in a biological medium).
- the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion are each formulated as a one or more, preferably a plurality of, individual beads, each of the portions having an independent dissolution profile (e.g., the multiparticulate capsule).
- the ratio of beads corresponding to the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) (if present), are customized for the patient to provide a predetermined release profile, e.g., to provide a predetermined duration of release, a predetermined rate of reaching a therapeutic plasma concentration of the drug or prodrug, or a predetermined maximum release rate (e.g., customized for the size, sensitivity, or clearance rate of the particular patient), etc.
- using more of the first IR portion may increase the rate at which a therapeutic plasma concentration is reached
- using more of the second substantially zero order release portion may increase the maximum release rate and the sustained plasma concentration of the drug or prodrug, and using a different second substantially zero order release portion (or an additional sustained release portion) having additional reserves of drug or additional coatings to delay release can extend the duration of the sustained release phase.
- the beads are fully or partially coated by a bioadhesive polymeric material.
- the beads in the first IR portion may not be coated, but the beads of the second (if present) and third portions (if present), may be so coated to assist delivery of drug over an extended period of time.
- At least the substantially zero-order release rate second portion is coated or partially covered by a bioadhesive polymeric material.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material is selected from polyamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polyurethanes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride ), (need to make sure these are fixed throughout specification), blends, and copolymers thereof.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material is poly(fumaric-co- sebacic) anhydride.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material comprises a catechol moiety.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material may comprise a mixture of a polymeric material and a compound comprising a catechol moiety selected from L-dopa, D- dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- bioadhesive polymeric material may be selected from polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes, polystyrene, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), poly( valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends and copolymers thereof.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material is covalently functionalized with a catechol moiety, such as one derived from L-dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- a catechol moiety such as one derived from L-dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- the pharmaceutical composition is formulated for oral administration, or for parental administration.
- the pharmaceutical composition is suitable for human administration, or for veterinary treatment of a non-human mammal.
- the pharmaceutical composition is provided in solid forms (e.g., powders, beads, etc.).
- certain portions or the whole pharmaceutical composition are in liquid forms.
- the IR portion may be in the form of a liquid, while the CR (second) portion or sub-portions may be suspended as tiny particles or beads in the liquid IR.
- an inert pharmaceutically acceptable material, carrier, or excipient may be liquid, while both the IR and the CR may be suspended as tiny particles or beads in the liquid.
- At least one adverse side effect (e.g., the on-off effect or the the wearing off effect, etc.) associated with the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder is reduced or eliminated.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition provides a substantially reduced degree of fluctuation in the plasma levels of the effective ingredients (e.g., levodopa or carbidopa) compared to an immediate release pharmaceutical composition of the same dose administered three times daily.
- the effective ingredients e.g., levodopa or carbidopa
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method of making a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising combining the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, the substantially elevating release portion (if present), and the substantially ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) (if present), of any of the subject pharmaceutical composition into a single dosage form.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising administering to the patient any of the subject pharmaceutical compositions discussed herein.
- the method comprises first administering to the patient the subject pharmaceutical composition with the first IR portion and the second zero-order release portion, followed by administering the substantially ascending release portion when the previously administered pharmaceutical composition is or is about to be completed in the patient.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical preparation comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition, in an amount sufficient to treat a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease or another movement disorder, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and a label or instructions (written and/or pictorial) for the use of the formulation for treating Parkinson's disease or another movement disorder, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated to provide a sustained and/or increasing dose over at least about 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, or more hours when administered to the patient.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical preparation comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition, provided in the form of a transdermal patch and formulated for sustained release of the pharmaceutical composition in order to administer an amount sufficient to treat a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated to provide a sustained substantial zero-order release over at least about 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 or more hours when the patch is applied to the patient.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a single dosage formulation for treatment of a movement disorder comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, wherein the dosage formulation produces and maintains a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or precursor thereof over a period of at least about 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 or more hours.
- the single dosage formulation further comprises a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- the single dosage formulation includes a first immediate- release (IR) portion to attain a therapeutically effective concentration of the levodopa or precursor with about 2 hours (e.g., about 1.5 hrs, 1 hour, 45 min., 30 min., 20 min., 15 min., 10 min., 5 min., 2 min., 1 min., etc.) of administration to a patient.
- IR immediate- release
- the single dosage formulation may further comprises: (1) a sustained zero-order release portion to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa over a first period of hours; and, (2) a substantially ascending-release portion to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa at the end of the sustained zero-order release portion; wherein the single dosage formulation, upon administration to the patient, produces a therapeutically effective concentration of the levodopa or precursor with about 2 hours (e.g., less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min. to 1 hour, 15 to 20 min., etc.) of administration to a patient.
- a sustained zero-order release portion to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa over a first period of hours
- a substantially ascending-release portion to maintain
- the ascending release portion provides for a rate of decrease of levodopa in the patient from a therapeutically effective concentration to a sub- therapeutically effective concentration (e.g., ⁇ 75%, 50%, 25% or less) in a second period of time less than about 2 hours, e.g., within about 45 minutes, 1 hour, 1.5 hours, or 2 hours, e.g., to reduce sleep side effects.
- a therapeutically effective concentration e.g., ⁇ 75%, 50%, 25% or less
- a sub- therapeutically effective concentration e.g., ⁇ 75%, 50%, 25% or less
- the ratio of the inhibitor to levodopa or the precursor in at least the first IR portion is greater than 1 :4.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is present in only the first IR portion and the sustained zero-order release portion.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is present in all the portions, wherein the ratio of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor to levodopa is different amongst different portions, e.g., the ratio is higher in earlier-released portions than in later- released portions.
- the sustained zero-order release portion comprises two or more sub-portions differing in the ratio of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor to levodopa, e.g., the ratio is higher in earlier-released portions than in later-released portions.
- At least one of the first IR portion, the second substantially zero order release portion, and the substantially ascending release portion further comprise at least one dopamine transport inhibitor, preferably in sufficient amount to decrease dopamine elimination.
- the second substantially zero order release portion, and/or the substantially ascending release portion further comprise a bioadhesive polymeric material.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material comprises an additive that stabilizes the polymeric material from erosion, dissolution or both, wherein at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive material remains after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material comprises an additive selected from one or more of a polyanhydride, an acidic component, a metal compound, a stabilizing polymer and a hydrophobic component.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a single dosage formulation for treatment (e.g., once-a-day) of a movement disorder comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, and a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, wherein the single dosage formulation, upon administration to the patient, produces a therapeutically effective concentration of the levodopa or precursor with about 2 hours (e.g., in less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min.
- the therapeutically effective concentration being maintained for a period of hours, then at the end of the dosing decreases to a sub- therapeutically effective concentration to, for example, reduce sleep side effects, in a period of time less than about 2 hours, e.g., within about 45 minutes, 1 hour, 1.5 hours, or 2 hours.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a therapeutic composition as described above, except that the dosage form is coated by a layer of delayed-release coating, such that the first IR portion will not start to be released until after a pre-determined period of time, such as the normal 6-10 hours of sleep time.
- a dose taken by the patient at night for example, just before sleep, would start to be released and thus become effective just before or around the time the patient wakes up in the morning. This would allow the patient to have an effective plasma concentration of levodopa or precursor thereof upon waking in the morning, and the patient can immediately participate in normal daily activities without delay.
- An additional advantage of the subject formulation relates to tolerance. Specifically, with enteral infusion, patients generally develop tolerance after prolonged period of treatment. However, the subject formulation has the added benefit of having a "break" during the night, so tolerance is generally not developed.
- the invention provides a general method of delivering a pharmaceutical composition, comprising administering to an individual the pharmaceutical composition coated by a delayed release coating, such that the release of the effective components of the pharmaceutical composition is delayed by a predetermined period of time, e.g., at least about 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, or more.
- the invention provide a pharmaceutical composition coated by a delayed release coating, such that upon administering the pharmaceutical composition to an individual, the release of the effective components of the pharmaceutical composition is delayed by a predetermined period of time, e.g., at least about 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, or more.
- the pharmaceutical composition is administered at night, such that the delayed release starts the next morning.
- the pharmaceutical composition with the delayed release coating is administered with the same pharmaceutical composition without the delayed release coating, such that the individual needs only take medicine once rather than twice (or multiple times) a day.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition for day time administration (e.g., need not have sleep-inducing agent); (2) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition for night time administration (e.g., comprising sleep-inducing agent).
- a first pharmaceutical composition comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition for day time administration (e.g., need not have sleep-inducing agent);
- a second pharmaceutical composition comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition for night time administration (e.g., comprising sleep-inducing agent).
- the first and/or the second pharmaceutical composition is packaged separately as individual doses.
- the package comprises at least one dose each of the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions.
- the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions are distinctively marked by color, shape, and/or size.
- the packaged pharmaceutical composition further comprises an instruction that instructs a patient to take the first pharmaceutical composition as a day dose, and to take the second pharmaceutical composition as a night dose.
- the package comprises sufficient doses for treating a patient over a week, 2 weeks, a month, 3 months, 6 month or more.
- Another aspect of the invention provides drug delivery devices, such as those described herein below (e.g., those in Figures 1-14 and 18-42, and those described in the Examples.
- Effective compositions (drugs and/or prodrugs, etc.) in these devices may be formulated to achieve any desired release profiles.
- these devices may be used to achieve the subject drug release profiles, such as those depicted in Figures 15 and 16.
- the patient's plasma levels of levodopa are within a therapeutic window, e.g., between about 680 and 3400 ng/mL, during periods of activity, e.g., during most or all waking hours.
- administration of a composition of the invention does not provide a plasma level of levodopa above 3400 ng/mL at any time during the course of administration.
- one aspect of the invention provides a multiparticulate pharmaceutical composition, comprising: (1) a plurality of pellets, each said pellets comprising a core comprising one or more effective ingredients; and (2) a matrix material; wherein the pellets are dispersed in the matrix material, and are released upon dissolution of the matrix material.
- the matrix material disintegrates within about 5 minutes, 4 min., 3 min., 2 min., or less than 1 minute in an aqueous solution.
- the aqueous solution is gastric acid.
- the matrix material comprises a cushioning material.
- the pharmaceutical composition is an eroding tablet and the matrix material gradually erodes over a predetermined period of time.
- the eroding tablet is at least partially coated by a support material or a bioadhesive material.
- the plurality of pellets comprises two or more different types of pellets.
- a first type of pellets further comprises one or more coatings around the core of each pellet.
- the coatings comprise a bioadhesive polymer, a composition for controlled release, and a dispersion-promoting composition.
- the coatings comprise a bioadhesive polymer, a composition for controlled release, a composition for delayed release, a dispersion-promoting composition, and/or a functional or non-functional polymer.
- the different coatings are in two or more discrete layers.
- At least two different coatings e.g., a bioadhesive polymeric material and a controlled-release composition, are combined in the same coating layer.
- the layers comprise a controlled-release layer disposed around the core, a bioadhesive polymeric material layer disposed around the controlled- release layer, and a dispersion-promoting layer disposed around the bioadhesive polymeric material layer.
- the effective ingredients comprise about 50-80% (v/v) of the coated pellets.
- the effective ingredients are at least about 60% (v/v) of the coated pellets, and the effective ingredients are cohesive, plastic, and engage in hydrogen bonding.
- the pellets are no more than 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, or 0.1 mm in size.
- the pellets are substantially homogeneous in size and/or shape.
- the core is substantially free of microcrystalline cellulose.
- the effective ingredient is one or more of: metformin, acyclovir, ranitidine, riboflavin, chlorthiazide, gabapentin, losartin potassium, ganciclovir, cimetidine, minocycline, fexofenadine, bupropion, orlistat, captopril, diphenhydramine, tripelennamine, chlorpheniramine maleate, promethazine, omeprazole, prostaglandin, carbenoxolane, sucralphate, isosorbide, quinidine, enalapril, nifedipine, verapamil, diltiazem, nadolol, timolol, pindolol, salbutamol, terbutaline, carbuterol, broxaterol, aminophylline, cyclizine, cinnarizine, domperidone, alizapride, vincristine, megestrol a
- Another aspect of the invention provides method to formulate a pharmaceutical composition, comprising: (1) blending the pharmaceutical composition to form a dry mix; (2) granulating the dry mix under low shear condition with a granulation fluid to form a wet granulation; (3) extruding the wet granulation through a screen-type extruder to form extrudate; (4) spheronizing the extrudate to form spheronized pellets; and (5) drying the pellets.
- the pharmaceutical composition comprises two or more effective ingredients.
- Another aspect of the invention provides method to formulate a pharmaceutical composition, comprising: (1) blending the pharmaceutical composition to form a dry mix; (2) granulating the dry mix under
- the eroding tablet is at least partially coated by a support material or a bioadhesive material.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition formulated by any of the subject methods.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method to formulate a pharmaceutical composition, comprising: (1) blending the pharmaceutical composition to form a dry mix; (2) granulating the dry mix under low shear condition with a granulation fluid to form a wet granulation; (3) drying the wet granulation to form dried granulation; (4) grinding the dried granulation, and sieving through a screen of predetermined size to form sieved granules; (5) blending in a lubricant to the sieved granules to form a uniformly lubricated dry mix.
- the pharmaceutical composition comprises two or more effective ingredients.
- the effective ingredients comprise levodopa and/or a metabolic precursor thereof, and a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- the pharmaceutical composition comprises a bioadhesive polymeric material and/or a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of microcrystalline cellulose.
- the pharmaceutical composition in step (1), is substantially free of lubricants.
- the granulation fluid is purified water, an aqueous solution of a mineral or organic acid, an aqueous solution of a polymeric composition, a pharmaceutically acceptable alcohol, a ketone or a chlorinated solvent, a hydro-alcoholic mixture, an alcoholic or hydro-alcoholic solution of a polymeric composition, or a solution of a polymeric composition in a chlorinated solvent or in a ketone.
- the method further comprises: passing the lubricated dry mix through a second screen.
- the method further comprises: compressing the lubricated dry mix into a tablet.
- the method further comprises: film-coating the tablet with one or more coating compositions.
- the coating compositions comprise a bioadhesive polymeric material, a composition for controlled-release, a composition for delayed-release, a dispersion-promoting composition, and/or a functional or non-functional polymer.
- the different coating compositions, if present, are in discrete layers.
- At least two different coating compositions are mixed in the same coating layer.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition formulated with the subject methods.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a multiparticulate pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion comprising: (a) a plurality of pellets comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof (levodopa pellets), and (b) a plurality of pellets comprising carbidopa or a prodrug thereof (carbidopa pellets), wherein said first IR portion is formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient within about 30 minutes of administration to the patient, and (2) a second portion comprising a plurality of pellets (levodopa-carbidopa pellets), each comprising: (a) a first core comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof) and carbidopa (or a prodrug thereof); and (b)
- the w/w ratio of carbidopa: levodopa is about 1 :4 in the first and second portions.
- the second portion comprises about 80-90% of the levodopa in the pharmaceutical composition.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (3) a third portion comprising a plurality of pellets (levodopa-bioadhesive pellets), each comprising: (a) a second core comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof); and, (b) a bioadhesive polymeric material coating the second core, wherein the second and third portions are formulated to release levodopa at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient.
- a third portion comprising a plurality of pellets (levodopa-bioadhesive pellets), each comprising: (a) a second core comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof); and, (b) a bioadhesive polymeric material coating the second core, wherein the second and third portions are formulated to release levodopa at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically
- the second and third portions comprise about 80-90% of the levodopa in the pharmaceutical composition.
- the second portion comprises about 60-70% of the levodopa in the pharmaceutical composition.
- the levodopa pellets, the carbidopa pellets, the levodopa- carbidopa pellets, and the levodopa-bioadhesive pellets are all disposed in a capsule.
- the levodopa pellets, the carbidopa pellets, the levodopa- carbidopa pellets, and the levodopa-bioadhesive pellets are all dispersed in a matrix material that disintegrates within about 5 minutes in an aqueous solution.
- the matrix material comprises a cushioning material, e.g., for absorbing shocks and/or reducing frictions on the surface of the coated pellets.
- the levodopa pellets, the carbidopa pellets, the levodopa- carbidopa pellets, and the levodopa-bioadhesive pellets are all dispersed in a matrix of an eroding tablet that gradually erodes over a predetermined period of time.
- the eroding tablet is at least partially coated by a support material or a bioadhesive material.
- the bioadhesive polymeric material coating the first and the second cores further comprises a dispersion-promoting agent, such as hydroxypropylcellulose.
- the levodopa pellets, the carbidopa pellets, the levodopa- carbidopa pellets, and the levodopa-bioadhesive pellets are no more than about 2 mm, 1 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, or 0.1 mm in size.
- the pellets are substantially homogeneous in size and/or shape.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of microcrystalline cellulose.
- the bioadhesive material comprises an additive that stabilizes the material from erosion, dissolution or both, wherein at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive material remains after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- the bioadhesive material comprises an additive selected from one or more of a polyanhydride, an acidic component, a metal compound, a stabilizing polymer and a hydrophobic component.
- a multilayer tablet pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first controlled-release (CR) layer comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof) and carbidopa (or a prodrug thereof), wherein the w/w ratio of carbidopa : levodopa is about 1 :4 in the CR layer; (2) a second, bioadhesive layer covering at least a portion of the first CR layer; wherein the tablet is formulated to release levodopa at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient.
- CR controlled-release
- the multilayer tablet pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (3) a third, immediate-release (IR) layer comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof) and carbidopa (or a prodrug thereof), said third layer covering at least a portion of the first CR layer and/or the second bioadhesive layer, wherein the w/w ratio of carbidopa : levodopa is about 1 :4 in the third IR layer.
- IR immediate-release
- the CR layer comprises about 75-85%, or about 80% of the total levodopa in the composition.
- the subject multilayer tablet pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (4) a fourth, pre-compressed immediate-release (IR) portion comprising levodopa (or a metabolic precursor thereof) and carbidopa (or a prodrug thereof), wherein said fourth portion is disposed within the CR layer, and wherein the w/w ratio of carbidopa : levodopa is about 1 :4 in the fourth portion.
- IR immediate-release
- the fourth portion comprises about 15-25% of the total levodopa in the composition
- the CR layer comprises about 50-70% of the total levodopa in the composition.
- a pharmaceutical composition comprising: a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (1) one or more bioadhesive layers, (2) one or more bioadhesive compositions, e.g., incorporated in the pharmaceutical composition, or (3) one or more bioadhesive compositions incorporated, e.g., as layers, in the pharmaceutical composition, for example, as a multilayer tablet.
- These subject pharmaceutical compositions may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site.
- the formulation may be in many different forms, such as a matrix tablet, a bilayer tablet, a trilayer tablet, or a multiparticulate capsule, etc.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of levodopa.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of immediate release formulation of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitors.
- less than 50%, 25%, 15%, or even 10% of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitors in the pharmaceutical composition is released within the first hour or first 2 hours after administration to the patient.
- less than 50%, less than 25%, less than 15% or even less than 10% of the decarboxylase inhibitor in the formulation is released within the first hour, or even the first two hours, after release of the decarboxylase inhibitor commences.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to provide a constant effective plasma concentration starting at least about 4 hours after administration to the patient.
- the predetermined extended period of time is about 7-14 hours, 8-14 hours, or about 9-13 hours, or about 10-12 hours, or about 11 hours.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is released at a substantially constant rate over the predetermined extended period of time.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated in a partially exposed core between two bioadhesive layers.
- the target absorption site is proximal to the small intestine, such as proximal small intestine.
- the composition further comprises a sleep-inducing agent, such as those described herein.
- the composition further comprises one or more of: a dopaminergic and anti-cholinergic agent selected from: amantadine; an anti-cholinergic agent selected from: trihexyphenidyl, benztropine, ethoproprazine, or procyclidine; a dopamine agonist selected from: apomorphine, bromocriptine, cabergoline, lisuride, pergolide, pramipexole, or ropinirole; a MAO-B (monoamine oxidase B) inhibitor selected from: selegiline or deprenyl; a COMT inhibitor selected from: CGP-28014, entacapone, or tolcapone; a muscle relaxant, such as baclofen; a sedative Clonazepam; an anticonvulsant agent carbamazepine; a dopamine reuptake inhibitor tetrabenazine; a dopamine blocker haloperidol;
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is carbidopa, a carbidopa prodrug, benserazide, methylphenidate, or a combination thereof.
- the total dose of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is about 25 - 300 mg, about 50 - 200 mg, or about 100 mg.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers include bioadhesive materials selected from chitosan, hyaluronic acid, hyaluran, thiomers, poly(methylvinylether- co-malic anhydride), polyamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyvinyl alcohols, carbopols, carbomers, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polyurethanes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends and copolymers thereof.
- bioadhesive materials selected from chitosan, hyaluronic acid, hyaluran, thiomers, poly(methylvinylether- co-malic anhydride), polyamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyvinyl alcohols
- the one or more bioadhesive layers include poly(fumaric-co- sebacic) anhydride.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprise bioadhesive materials having a catechol moiety.
- the bioadhesive materials comprise a mixture of a material and a compound comprising a catechol moiety selected from L-Dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- the bioadhesive materials are selected from polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes, polystyrene, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends, and/or copolymers thereof.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprise bioadhesive material covalently functionalized with a catechol moiety.
- the catechol moiety is derived from L-dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprises an additive that stabilizes the bioadhesive layers from erosion, dissolution or both, wherein at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive layers remain after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- the bioadhesive layers comprise an additive selected from one or more of a polyanhydride, an acidic component, a metal compound, a stabilizing polymer and a hydrophobic component.
- the composition is suitable for human treatment, or for veterinary treatment of a non-human mammal.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method of making a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising combining the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor with one or more bioadhesive layers of any of the subject pharmaceutical composition (e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising one or more bioadhesive layers that may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site) into a single dosage form.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising administering to the patient any of a subject pharmaceutical composition (e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising one or more bioadhesive layers that may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site).
- a subject pharmaceutical composition e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising one or more bioadhesive layers that may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target
- the pharmaceutical composition is administered before the patient goes to sleep.
- the pharmaceutical composition is administered shortly before, with, or after the patient's last meal before going to sleep.
- the method further comprises administering a second pharmaceutical composition comprising levodopa or metabolic precursor thereof 6-12 hours thereafter.
- a packaged pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder comprising: (1) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising any of the subject pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising one or more bioadhesive layers that may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site); (2) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof.
- a first pharmaceutical composition comprising any of the subject pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., those comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, preferably lasting 6-12 hours, and optionally comprising one or more
- the first and/or the second pharmaceutical compositions are packaged separately as individual doses.
- the package comprises at least one dose each of the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions.
- the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions are differentiated by color, shape, marking, imprinting, and/or size, etc.
- the composition further comprises an instruction that instructs a patient to take the first pharmaceutical composition before sleep, and to take the second pharmaceutical composition after waking.
- the package comprises sufficient doses for treating a patient over a week.
- the invention also provides for bioadhesive granules. These granules can be used to fabricate new drug delivery or diagnostic systems with increased residence time at tissue surfaces, and consequently increase the bioavailability of a drug or a diagnostic agent.
- the bioadhesive granules of the invention can be prepared to be flowable and compressible, e.g., suitable for use in drug manufacturing equipment and processes.
- the bioadhesive granules of the invention can be compressed, e.g., to manufacture a coating on a controlled release oral dosage formulation and/or form a matrix in an oral dosage formulation.
- the granules may be compressed into a film, sheet, tablet, hollow, cylinder, ring, or rod, etc.
- the invention also provides for methods of manufacturing granules.
- the invention provides a method for the manufacture of granules comprising a bioadhesive polymer, comprising i) dissolving a bioadhesive polymer in a solvent to form a solution, ii) combining a second polymer with the solution, and, iii) evaporating solvent from said solution under conditions that result in the formation of granules.
- the bioadhesive polymer comprises zein, shellac, thiomers, POLYOXTM polymers, CORPLEXTM polymers (Corium International, Redwood City, CA), GANTREZ® polymers (International Specialty Products, Wayne, NJ), gliadin, and/or polycarbophils.
- the bioadhesive polymer is selected from SPHEROMERTM I [p(FASA) (1 :4)], SPHEROMERTM II, SPHEROMERTM III, and SPHEROMERTM IV polymers (such as those described herein).
- the second polymer is a hydrophobic polymer.
- the second polymer is a hydrophilic polymer.
- the second polymer is a non-bioadhesive polymer.
- the invention provides bioadhesive granules comprising about 2% to about 20% of a bioadhesive polymer and about 80% to about 98% of a second polymer.
- the bioadhesive polymer comprises zein, shellac, thiomers, POLYOXTM polymers, CORPLEXTM polymers, GANTREZ® polymers, gliadin, and/or polycarbophils.
- the bioadhesive polymer is selected from SPHEROMERTM I [p(FASA) (1 :4)], SPHEROMERTM II, SPHEROMERTM III, and SPHEROMERTM IV polymers (such as those described herein).
- the second polymer is a non-bioadhesive polymer.
- the second polymer is selected from methylcellulose (MC), carboxymethylcellulose (CMC), hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC), hydroxypropylcellulose (HPC), polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer, polyethylene oxide (PEO), methacrylic acid copolymers, methacrylic ester copolymers, ammonioalkyl methacrylate copolymers, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, chitin, chitosan, and ethyl cellulose.
- MC methylcellulose
- CMC carboxymethylcellulose
- HEC hydroxyethylcellulose
- HPMC hydroxypropylmethylcellulose
- HPMC hydroxypropylcellulose
- PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
- PVP vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer
- PEO polyethylene oxide
- the granules can be compressed into a solid matrix.
- the invention provides a bioadhesive polymer comprising a poly(ethylene-co-maleic anhydride) polymer backbone functionalized with residues of at least one compound comprising: (a) an aromatic moiety comprising two or more hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, and (b) a primary or secondary amino moiety.
- the cumulative amount of the compound, when not functionalized to a polymer backbone, that is converted to dopamine when infused into rat striatum is at least 65% less than for an equimolar amount of L-3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine or wherein the blood-brain barrier is substantially impermeable to the compound, when not functionalized to a polymer backbone.
- Embodiments described herein are contemplated to be combined with each other embodiments as appropriate. Embodiments described in detail under one aspect of the invention may be equally applicable for the other aspects of the invention.
- Figure 1 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Layers 11-13 represent the immediate-release composition layer (IR), the substantially zero-order release rate composition layer, and the optional ascending release (e.g., second IR) layer, respectively.
- Layer 14 is an insoluble plug that seals off one end of the open-ended container / shell 15. In this embodiment, Layers 11, 12, (and optionally 13) are exposed and released in sequential order.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Beads 21-23 represents the immediate-release composition portion (IR), the substantially zero-order release rate composition portion, and the optional ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion), respectively.
- the container / shell encompassing the beads may be made from any pharmaceutically acceptable material, such as gelatin, starch, HPMC (hydroxypropyl methylcellulose), pullulan, and fast dissolving capsules.
- the concentric rings on the beads represent different layers of coating, each of which layers may have different compositions and/or result in different release profiles.
- Figure 3 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the three layers represents the immediate-release composition layer (IR) 31, a bioadhesive layer (hatched lines) 32, and the substantially zero- order release rate composition layer 33.
- IR immediate-release composition
- bioadhesive layer hatchched lines
- substantially zero- order release rate composition layer 33 There may be one or more well-defined exit ports 34 on the bioadhesive layer to allow the inner contents to be released, or the bioadhesive layer 32 may be permeable to release of the encapsulated drug.
- the port size may increase in diameter over time, or when the dissolution progresses.
- Figure 4 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device. It is essentially identical to that depicted in Figure 3 (e.g., having IR layer 41, bioadhesive coating 42, zero-order release core 43, and exit port 44), with an additional (optional) core 45 inside the substantially zero-order release rate composition layer 43, which optional core 45 is the ascending release layer (such as the second IR layer).
- Figure 5 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the three shown layers represent the immediate-release composition layer (IR) 51, and two substantially zero-order release rate composition layers (CRl 52 and CR2 53).
- IR immediate-release composition
- CRl 52 and CR2 53 substantially zero-order release rate composition layers
- the inner trilayer core is coated with a semi-permeable coating 54a, which is then coated over by a bioadhesive layer or patch (hatched lines) 54b.
- the therapeutic compositions are successively released through an orifice 56 close to the IR composition (proximal end) 51.
- the distal end of the shell may comprise a plug 55 that can push the therapeutic compositions towards the orifice 56 at the proximal end.
- the push mechanism can be any suitable means, such as a water-absorbing gel that swells when in contact with aqueous solution, or a gas-generating unit, or a rigid plate / plunger that can be driven by a micromotor (optionally externally activated).
- Figure 6 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the three shown cores represent the immediate-release composition core (IR) 61, and two substantially zero-order release rate composition cores (CRl 62 and CR2 63), each coated by its own bioadhesive layer (hatched lines 620 and 630, respectively).
- IR immediate-release composition core
- CRl 62 and CR2 63 substantially zero-order release rate composition cores
- Figure 7 is a schematic cross-section view (not to scale) of two embodiments of a portion of the dosage form (e.g., the second zero-order release rate portion).
- the composition may be formed as a cylinder or a column, or have a trapezoid profile (right panel).
- the compositions e.g., levodopa 72 and carbidopa 71
- the top (beginning) of the dosage form has a different carbidopa / levodopa ratio from the bottom (end) of the dosage form.
- Figure 8 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the three shown layers represent the immediate-release composition core (IR) 81, one sub-portion of the substantially zero-order release rate composition CRl 82, and a second sub-portion of the substantially zero-order release rate composition CR2 83, in the form of beads with or without bioadhesive coating and/or delayed release coating, and a bioadhesive composition layer 84 adjacent to the zero-order release rate composition CRl 82.
- IR immediate-release composition core
- CRl substantially zero-order release rate composition
- CR2 second sub-portion of the substantially zero-order release rate composition CR2 83
- a bioadhesive composition layer 84 adjacent to the zero-order release rate composition CRl 82.
- There can be more than one sub-portions of the substantially zero-order release rate composition embedded within layer 82 such as CR3, CR4, etc., not shown).
- Each sub-portion may differ by their specific compositions (for example, the ratio of carbidopa / levodopa in the Parkinson's disease therapeutic composition).
- the different sub-portions may be coated with different delayed-release compositions (optionally with different thickness, etc.), and/or beads may adopt a patterned distribution within the CRl layer, such that the beads of the same sub-portion start to release therapeutic compositions at substantially the same time.
- beads of the same sub- portion may start to release therapeutic compositions at staggered time points to effect a specific release profile, such as an ascending release profile.
- FIG 9 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the immediate-release composition layer 91 covers the bioadhesive composition layer 94, which has a hollow core that may adopt any desired geometric shape (regular or irregular, symmetrical or asymmetrical). Once the IR layer 91 is dissolved, it exposes the peripheral ends of CRl 93.
- the bioadhesive layer 94 covers the inner contents, which are to be gradually released through the peripheral ends. In the shown embodiment, the center of the hollow core is occupied by a sub-portion of the zero-order release rate composition CR2 92 (or the second IR release portion).
- the rest of the core is filled with other sub-portion(s) of the zero-order release rate composition CRl 93.
- the geometric shape allows gradually increasing (as shown) or decreasing (not shown) amounts of drugs to be released in unit time periods.
- Each sub-portion may differ by their specific compositions (for example, the ratio of carbidopa / levodopa in the Parkinson's disease therapeutic composition).
- the IR layer 91 can also be part of the CRl 93 core, in form of a lip or lid (not shown).
- FIG 10 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the device is shaped like a torus or donut with a central hole.
- the immediate-release composition layer 1001 covers the entire surface, or almost the entire surface of the device.
- the IR layer 1001 Underneath the IR layer 1001 is the bioadhesive composition layer 1004, which covers almost the entire surface except a portion of the inner surface of the donut hole.
- the inner core covered by the bioadhesive layer is one or more sub-portions of the zero-order release rate composition, for example, CRl 1002 and/or CR2 1003 as shown (or the second IR release portion).
- the CR inner cores need not be of regular and/or symmetric shape. Neither does the two or more CR sub-portions need to be horizontally arranged to effect simultaneous release. A vertical arrangement of the CR sub-portions within the inner core may be used to effect sequential release of different CR sub-portions.
- Figure 11 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the immediate-release composition 1101 covers the two ends of a rod-shaped device (although the IR can cover the entire surface of the device, not shown).
- Towards the more central parts of the rod are several sub-portions of the zero-order release rate composition CRl 1102, separated from one another by other sub- portions of the zero-order release rate composition CR2 1103.
- the release of each CR2 1103 is delayed temporarily by a ring of bioadhesive composition 1104, and by the adjacent layers of CRl 1102.
- the rod may break into two or more smaller rods / parts due to the dissolution of CRl 1102 sub-portions.
- one or more CR2 1103 sub-portions may start to release from one side, or both sides of the sub-portion.
- Figure 12 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device - a bioadhesive buccal patch or buccal tablet attaching to a mucosa of the mouth 1201.
- the immediate-release composition layer 1202 covers one sub-portion of the zero-order release rate composition CRl 1203, which covers another sub-portion of the zero-order release rate composition CR2 1204 (or the second IR release portion).
- the whole device may be formulated as a multilaminate bioadhesive buccal patch or tablet attaching to a mucosa area of the mouth. Either or both CR layers may have their own bioadhesive layer or patch (not shown).
- Figure 13 shows a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device - a dose sipping system.
- the therapeutic compositions are deposited in a straw plugged at one end by a porous plug 1303.
- a liquid e.g., a glass of water
- the immediate- release composition 1301 forms a matrix that contains one or more sub-portions of the substantially zero-order release rate composition CRl and/or CR2 1302, in the form of beads with or without bioadhesive coating and/or delayed release coating.
- the substantially zero-order release rate composition embedded within matrix 1301 (such as CR3, CR4, etc., not shown).
- the sub-portions may differ by their specific compositions (for example, the ratio of carbidopa / levodopa in the Parkinson's disease therapeutic composition).
- the sub-portion(s) of the substantially zero-order release rate composition e.g., CRl 1302
- the IR portion may also be formulated as beads embedded with the other CR beads within an inert matrix.
- Figure 14 shows a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- the therapeutic compositions are encompassed within a shell with a cap 1404 and a body 1405.
- the cap 1404 may be made of gelatin or other equivalent materials, while the body 1405 may be a bioadhesive layer itself, or a part of the gelatin body coated with a bioadhesive composition.
- the substantially zero-order release rate composition CRl 1402 and/or CR2 1403 either in the form of beads embedded within an inert matrix (not shown), with or without bioadhesive coating and/or delayed release coating, or in the form of successive layers.
- the cross-section is shown as a rectangle, it can be in any suitable shape (such as oval), and need not be symmetrical or regularly shaped.
- Figure 15 is a schematic drawing showing plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa for an exemplary levodopa-carbidopa dosage formulation: Immediate Release
- Figure 16 is a schematic drawing showing plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa for an exemplary levodopa-carbidopa dosage formulation: Immediate Release
- Figure 17 illustrates a blister packaging of an exemplary levodopa-carbidopa dosage formulation for day and night administration, e.g., during a period of one week (other packages with different treatment cycles, such as monthly package with multiple such weekly packages, are also contemplated, but not shown).
- the dosage forms for day and night administration can be differentiated by e.g., color, and optionally by shape, marking, imprint, etc.
- the ratio of levodopa and carbidopa in the exemplary dosage formulations may be different for day and night administrations.
- the release rate of levodopa and carbidopa in the exemplary dosage formulations may be different for day and night administrations.
- the dosage form for night may comprise carbidopa extended release dosage ⁇ e.g., substantially free of levodopa) followed by levodopa-carbidopa extended release dosage for morning delivery.
- Figure 18 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 19 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 20 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 21 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 22 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 23 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 24 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 25 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 26 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 27 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 28 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 29 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 30 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 31 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 32 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 33 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 34 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 35 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 36 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 37 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 38 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 39 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 40 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 41 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 42 is a schematic drawing (not to scale) illustrating a cross-sectional view of one design of the subject delivery device.
- Figure 43 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa in fed beagle dogs for SINEMET ® CR 50-200 tablets.
- Figure 44 shows in vitro dissolution profiles of levodopa and carbidopa for levodopa- carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multilayer extended release tablets in 0.1 N HCl.
- Figure 45 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa in fed beagle dogs for levodopa-carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multilayer extended release tablets.
- Figure 46 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa in fasted beagle dogs for levodopa-carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multilayer extended release tablets.
- Figure 47 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa in fed beagle dogs for SINEMET ® CR 50-200 Tablets and levodopa-carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multiparticulate capsules.
- Figure 48 shows plasma concentration profiles of carbidopa in fed beagle dogs for SINEMET ® CR 50-200 Tablets and levodopa-carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multiparticulate capsules.
- Figure 49 shows in vitro dissolution profiles of levodopa and carbidopa for SINEMET ® CR 50-200 Tablets in 0.1 N HCl.
- Figure 50 provides an exemplary scheme or drug cycle regarding the release of different components of the subject single dosage formulation.
- Figure 51 shows HPLC analysis of in vitro dissolution profiles of an exemplary carbidopa extended release tablet (Bioadhesive Carbidopa 100 mg Trilayer Extended Release Tablets) in 0.1 N HCl - pH 1.2 and in PBS - pH 4.5.
- an exemplary carbidopa extended release tablet Bioadhesive Carbidopa 100 mg Trilayer Extended Release Tablets
- Figure 52 shows HPLC analysis of in vitro dissolution profiles of carbidopa extended release tablet (Bioadhesive Carbidopa 100 mg Trilayer Extended Release Tablets) in 0.1 N HCl - pH 1.2 and in PBS - pH 4.5.
- Figure 53 shows plasma concentration profiles of cabidopa in fed beagle dogs for an exemplary carbidopa extended release tablet (bioadhesive carbidopa 100 mg Trilayer Extended Release Tablets).
- Figure 54 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa in fed healthy young human volunteers for SINEMET ® CR 50-200 Tablets.
- Figure 55 shows plasma concentration profiles of levodopa and carbidopa in fed healthy young human volunteers for levodopa-carbidopa 200 mg/50 mg multilayer extended release tablets.
- Figure 56 shows the particle size distribution of SPHEROMERTM III / ethylcellulose granules.
- Figure 57 is a schematic drawing (not necessarily to scale) showing a possible drug release mechanism for the subject Levodopa-Carbidopa extended release (XL) tablets.
- Figure 58 shows the result of a representative release profile study using the subject Levodopa-Carbidopa extended release (XL) tablets, which contain bioadhesive backing layers. The results for 6 individual tablets, as well as the average result, over a time period of 20 hours are shown.
- XL Levodopa-Carbidopa extended release
- Figure 59 shows the result of a representative release profile study using the subject Levodopa-Carbidopa extended release (XL) tablets, which backing layers do not contain bioadhesive materials. The results for 6 individual tablets, as well as the average result, over a time period of 20 hours are shown.
- XL Levodopa-Carbidopa extended release
- the present invention relates to the treatment of movement disorders, such as Parkinson's disease and other movement disorders.
- the invention relates to particular dosage forms that provide release profiles of the particular therapeutic compounds that are the most effective for the intended therapeutic use (e.g., treatment of Parkinson's disease).
- the present invention provides a dosage form and a method for administering a movement disorder pharmaceutical composition (e.g., levodopa / carbidopa) in a once-a-day or more frequent regimen that ameliorates or overcomes symptoms of a movement disorder (e.g., Parkinson's disease) in a patient.
- a movement disorder pharmaceutical composition e.g., levodopa / carbidopa
- a movement disorder e.g., Parkinson's disease
- the single dosage formulation of the subject invention comprises levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, and a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, wherein the dosage formulation produces and maintains a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa or precursor thereof over a period of at least about 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, 12 hours, 14 hours, 16 hours, 18 hours, 20 hours or more.
- the pharmaceutical composition of the single dosage formulation may comprise: (1) a first immediate-release (IR) portion that provides a therapeutically effective concentration of a drug in the patient with about 2 hours (e.g., about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc.) of administration to the patient; (2) a second substantially zero order release portion comprising the drug, formulated to release the drug at a substantially zero-order release rate over a predetermined sustained treatment period to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of drug in the patient.
- IR immediate-release
- the subject dosage formulation is advantageous for reducing the "wearing off' and the "on off' issues.
- SINEMET ® CR DuPont Pharma
- a controlled release dosage form was designed to provide slow and simultaneous release of levodopa and carbidopa (U.S. Pat. No. 4,900,755).
- the subject dosage formulations provide a longer period of levodopa release within the therapeutically effective concentration than SINEMET ® does.
- Certain embodiments of the invention overcome the gastric emptying problem, resulting in considerably less fluctuation in levodopa plasma levels, which in turn ameliorates the "on-off ' problem.
- Prolonged suppression of disease manifestations with many traditional dosage forms is constrained by the mechanism of absorption of levodopa from the gastrointestinal tract.
- Levodopa is absorbed by the active transport mechanism for amino acids, which is most active in the duodenum region of the small intestine. Sustained release is therefore limited by the transit time of the dosage form through the stomach and duodenum which, though highly variable from individual to individual and dependent upon nutritional state, typically takes only about 3 to 4 hours.
- Levodopa released after the 3-4 hour therapeutic window has passed is not bioavailable.
- SINEMET ® CR carbidopa-levodopa controlled release tablets have about 75% of the bioavailability of SINEMET ® carbidopa-levodopa conventional release tablets.
- Certain delayed release dosage forms of the invention possess a coating that dissolves slowly in gastrointestinal fluid. Release of the active component is delayed until dissolution of the coating allows gastrointestinal fluid to contact a core of the dosage form containing the drug.
- the invention further provides certain bioadhesive polymer materials that help retain the pharmaceutical composition, such as one including levodopa, in the stomach of the patient.
- the period of release of the composition is timed to capitalize on the window of bioavailability.
- certain dosage forms of the invention overcome the gastric emptying problem, resulting in considerably less fluctuation in levodopa plasma levels, which in turn alleviates the "on-off problem. This is a significant advantage for delivering drugs like levodopa that have a short absorption window.
- Another advantage of certain embodiments of the invention is that a high concentration of levodopa in a patient's system, such as a "long tail" of levodopa concentration drop resulting from large doses of controlled release of levodopa / carbidopa at the end of the regimen, may be avoided by using a substantially ascending release portion, such as a second IR portion, in the dosage form released at the end of the treatment window, e.g., as the effects of carbidopa administration are waning, such that at the end of the therapeutic regimen (e.g., at the end of the day), the plasma level of levodopa quickly drops to below the effective level, so that the dosage form will not cause sleeping / resting problems for the patient.
- a substantially ascending release portion such as a second IR portion
- the subject release profile replaces the last segment of the traditional release profile with a last IR portion.
- effective concentration of carbidopa decreases / diminishes, allowing the body to metabolize levodopa faster and clearing it rapidly from the system.
- the presence of the last IR portion compensates for this more rapid processing, thus maintaining the effective levodopa concentration towards the end of the release profile.
- levodopa in the last IR portion is quickly consumed, leaving no undesirable long tail to interfere with the sleeping / resting of the patient.
- the subject pharmaceutical compositions are formulated to deliver rapidly upon administration an immediate-release (IR) dose, followed by a sustained release dose to maintain the effective therapeutic concentration, e.g., over at least 4 hours, and more preferably over at least 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, or even 16 hours after administration.
- IR immediate-release
- an immediate release is followed by a substantially zero- order release rate, which is optionally further followed by a substantially ascending rate of drug release, or additional immediate release.
- the substantially ascending rate of drug release compensates for the drop off in effective levodopa concentration in the patient's system when the second portion of substantial zero-order release reaches the end of its release profile (see Figure 15 below; compare the tail-down of the center curve, the corresponding rise of the right-most curve around the same time, and the relative stable plateau represented by the solid curve).
- a subsequent ascending release dose (such as the second IR portion) taken separately at mealtime (e.g., dinner) would provide the patient with additional needed therapeutic agent, if necessary, without having to resort to a second full-dose of drug for the same treatment period (e.g., day).
- the ascending portion (such as the second IR portion) may also be built into the single dosage treatment medicine (dosage form) such that the patient need only administer treatment once a day in the morning.
- Figure 15 shows an illustrative (non-limiting) release profile of the subject dosage form.
- the first IR portion (left-most sharp curve) allows a quick increase of levodopa concentration in a patient's system to within a therapeutically effective concentration range or window (the two dashed lines). This process should occur in less than about 2 hours ⁇ e.g., about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hr, 1.5 hrs, 2 hrs, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min.
- the concentration reaches its peak, or slightly before or after reaching the peak of the first IR portion release, the second sustained release portion begins to release (the middle dotted-curve in Figure 15), such that the total levodopa concentration is maintained within the therapeutic window. Certain fluctuation in concentration is tolerated, so long as the total concentration is not too high or too low to fall outside the effective therapeutic window.
- the zero-order release from the second portion is expected to maintain the total concentration within the therapeutic window for several hours, such as about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more hours, until the net release into the patient's system is less than the net uptake/metabolism by the system including metabolic processes and other degradation processes. At that point, the total concentration of levodopa may start to drop (the point where the middle dotted-curve touching the plateau region of the thick solid curve). In the absence of an optional ascending release portion (either built in the single dosage treatment regimen or taken separately), the effective concentration will assume a long-tailed drop. But with the optional ascending release portion (either built in the single dosage treatment regimen or taken separately), the release profile can be modified.
- the plateau region of the solid curve is extended to a total period of beyond about 8 hours, 10 hours, 12 hours, 14 hours, 16 hours, 20 hours or more. Again, some concentration fluctuation is tolerable during this extended plateau period, so long as it falls within the effective therapeutic window.
- the substantially ascending release portion may comprise levodopa, formulated to elevate the substantially zero-order release rate to a higher level, beginning around a predetermined time point, such as within 1 A, 1, 1.5, or 2 hours of noon (e.g., about 4-6 hours after administration to the patient).
- the (total) concentration of levodopa may optionally be allowed to drop quickly, e.g., within 30-120 minutes, such as within about 45 minutes, 1 hr, 1.5 hrs, or 2 hrs, to below a predetermined sub-therapeu-tically effective concentration through, for example, controlling the inhibitor / levodopa ratio.
- sub-therapeutically effective concentration refers to a value below the minimal effective concentration, such as less than about 75%, 50%, or about 25% of the minimal therapeutically effective concentration, which may vary depending on individual patients.
- the size of the plateau represented by the flat portion of the solid curve need not be limited to 4-12 hours as shown in the illustrative Figure 15.
- the same therapeutic composition as described above may be coated by a layer of delayed-release coating, such that the first IR portion will not start to be released until after a pre-determined period of time, such as the normal 6-10 hours of sleep time.
- a pre-determined period of time such as the normal 6-10 hours of sleep time.
- the medicine taken by the patient at night for example, just before sleep, would start to be effective just before the patient wakes up in the morning. This would allow the patient to have an effective therapeutic concentration already in his system when he wakes up in the morning, and immediately participate in his normal daily activities without delay.
- the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a sleep-inducing agent; and, (2) a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to reach and maintain an optimal plasma concentration at a predetermined time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient.
- the sleep-inducing agent is advantageous in that it helps to ensure relatively uniform timing between administration and release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor. For example, without the sleep-inducing agent, certain patients may fall sleep quickly after taking the medicine with the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, while others may take hours before they finally fall asleep. Assuming the same amount actual sleeping time is needed for both types of patients (e.g., 7-8 hrs), the level of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may reach the designed optimal level only in certain patients just before they wake up. In patients who take longer to fall asleep, the optimal level may have already passed when these patients wake up.
- patients will awaken with an effective plasma level of decarboxylase inhibitor and can take a morning dose of levodopa and/or carbidopa (as described above) without having to wait for the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor to reach an effective level before levodopa starts to take effect.
- the pharmaceutical composition with sleeping-inducing agent and decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may additionally comprise delayed-release IR and delayed CR portions.
- a first delayed immediate-release (DIR) portion comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof, formulated to provide a therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient within about 2 hours of the predetermined time; and (4) a second delayed controlled release (DCR) portion comprising levodopa and/or its precursor, formulated to release levodopa and/or the precursor at a substantially zero-order release rate over a sustained treatment period after the predetermined time, to maintain the therapeutically effective concentration of levodopa in the patient.
- DIR delayed immediate-release
- DCR delayed controlled release
- compositions are suitable for administration to a patient before sleeping.
- the sleep- inducing agent and the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor do not comprise the levodopa / carbidopa composition
- the levodopa / carbidopa composition may be separately administered to the patient in the morning upon waking.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to reach and maintain an optimal plasma concentration just at or just prior to the wake-up time, e.g., the predetermined time is about the average sleeping time from the administration of the sleep-inducing agent, such as 7 hrs, 8 hrs, 9 hrs, etc.
- the sleep-inducing agent and the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may be a "night pill,” while the levodopa / carbidopa extended releasecomposition may be a "morning pill.”
- the sequence of administering the two types of pills (night pill and morning pill) is critical to achieving the optimal therapeutic effect.
- Both dosage forms may be packaged together, for example, as compliance promoting twin blister packages, making it convenient and clear to the patient about the order and timing of administration of the two types of doses.
- the different dosage forms may be configured differently, e.g., by the appearance of the dosages themselves, such as different colors and/or different shapes, sizes, markings, imprintings, etc., or by labeling used in the packaging.
- the sleep-inducing agent/decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulation further comprises the levodopa / carbidopa composition
- the levodopa / carbidopa composition is formulated as delayed release formulation, such that levodopa / carbidopa will start to be released just at or just prior to the patient waking up, obviating the need for a separate morning dosage form.
- the sleep-inducing agent is benzodiazepine (e.g., LIBRIUM ® , VALIUM ® , HALCION ® ), Secobarbital (SECONAL ® ), a prescription sleeping aid medicine (e.g., AMBIEN ® , RESTORIL ® , DESYREL ® , and SONATA ® ), eszopiclone (e.g., LUNESTATM), or a non-prescription (over-the-counter) sleeping aid medicine (e.g., TYLENOL ® PM, EXCEDRIN PM ® , UNISOM ® / NYTOL ® / SLEEPINAL ® ).
- benzodiazepine e.g., LIBRIUM ® , VALIUM ® , HALCION ®
- Secobarbital SECONAL ®
- a prescription sleeping aid medicine e.g., AMBIEN ® , RE
- Figure 50 provides an exemplary scheme or drug cycle regarding the release of different components of the subject single dosage formulation. Depending on the specific embodiments involved, not all components are necessarily present. The timings of release are approximate and for illustration purposes only, and may not be to scale. A typical patient for the purpose of this figure follows a routine of waking up around 7 am in the morning and going to sleep around 10-1 1 pm at night. Specifically, for each portion (e.g., 1 st IR, substantial zero-order release, substantial elevating zero-order release, 2 nd IR, sleep-inducing agent & decarboxylase inhibitor, etc.), the closed circle indicates the approximate start of drug release, and the arrowhead indicates the approximate end or tailing off of the release.
- 1 st IR substantial zero-order release
- substantial elevating zero-order release substantial elevating zero-order release
- 2 nd IR sleep-inducing agent & decarboxylase inhibitor, etc.
- a delayed-release coating may be present to effect the delay.
- the stool softener, COMT inhibitor, and/or dopamine transport inhibitor, and other auxiliary drug components, etc., if present, may be released at any time during the drug cycle, with any effective components (1 st IR, substantial zero-order release, 2 nd IR, etc.), either simultaneously or sequentially (hence the dashed line).
- a patient can take one AM dose per day, and continue indefinitely if desirable.
- the patient may take one AM dose when waking up, followed by one PM dose before sleeping, and continue this pattern indefinitely if desirable.
- the PM dose may contain a sleep-inducing agent & a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- the patient may take one PM dose per day, and continue indefinitely if desired.
- the PM dose also contains effective components (e.g., carbidopa / levodopa) in delayed-release formulation, such that release profile similar to the left-hand side of Figure 50 (Day 1) is achieved for Day 2.
- release profiles may also be used to divide the different components into multiple dosage systems (such as a sleep aid, a night-time formulation, and a morning formulation, etc.), so long as the overall formulations are designed to release the drugs at or about the times indicated on the scheme.
- the subject dosage form allows rapid release of drug (e.g., levodopa) in the morning at a rate that results in rapid and reproducible onset of action, reduced frequency of administration, reduced severity of side effects (motor fluctuations).
- drug e.g., levodopa
- the onset of action may be effected at about 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes after the administration, or about 30 minutes, or about 45 minutes, or about 1 hour after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition comprising an immediate-release composition.
- the ratio of carbidopa (or other equivalent decarboxylase inhibitors) to levodopa is variable, between different individuals / patients, and/or between the different stages of release (e.g., immediate-release vs. substantially zero-order release vs. the optional substantially ascending / rapid rate of release), and/or within each stage of release (e.g., within the zero-order release stage).
- the carbidopa : levodopa ratio may be about 1 :20, 1 :15, 1:10, 1 :5, 1 :4, 1 :3, 1 :2, 1 :1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, or about 6:1 or more.
- carbidopa The usual daily therapeutic dose of carbidopa is approximately 75 mg per day, but carbidopa apparently fails to elicit adverse effects even at doses of 400 mg per day (Ahlskog, Hosp. Form., 27: 146, 1992). Thus the total daily dose of carbidopa may be anywhere below about 600 mg, 500 mg, or 400 mg.
- a greater than 1 :4 ratio of carbidopa: levodopa may be used (e.g. , greater than 1 :3, 1 :2, 1 :1, 2:1, etc.). This helps ensure that peripheral decarboxylase activity is substantially inhibited in the treated individual, without regard to any individual differences in peripheral decarboxylase level and/or activity.
- the carbidopa : levodopa ratio may be very low in the second IR portion (e.g.
- carbidopa may be omitted from this portion altogether, such that a rapid drop in effective levodopa can be effected towards the end of regimen, allowing the treated patient to sleep or rest normally without being substantially affected by the lingering effects of levodopa therapy that can disrupt normal sleep patterns.
- the carbidopa : levodopa ratio may vary even within a single release stage.
- the ratio may be closer to 1 :4 when entering this stage, and gradually decrease to 1 :5, 1 :6, 1 :8, 1 :9, 1 :10, etc., such that at the end of this stage, the ratio is substantially smaller than the starting ratio.
- This effect can be achieved using a number of approaches.
- carbidopa and levodopa may be mixed together and spun in a container to create a gradient of inhibitor : drug.
- carbidopa and levodopa may occupy two sides of an imaginal tilted plane dissecting a cylindrical column, such that an increasing or decreasing proportion of the dissolving surface comprises the inhibitor carbidopa.
- the release rate remains constant for the levodopa composition, while the release rate gradually decreases for carbidopa (see Figure 7).
- Yet another alternative is to stack many layers, each with a unique carbidopa:levodopa ratio, etc. Obviously, using these methods, the ratio may remain constant for any desired period or periods of time during the stage.
- the invention provides a bioadhesive dosage form that releases the drug at the target absorption site, and is less prone to gastric emptying, thus resulting in a more reproducible and consistent plasma level of levodopa, a drug with a narrow absorption window.
- the bioadhesive layer / patch is used in conjunction with the substantially zero-order release composition.
- Another approach to achieving a constant dopamine level in the brain is to work at the level of brain biochemistry.
- Dopamine in the brain is removed from the junction by mechanisms of dopamine uptake to stop information transfer. Partial blocking of the dopamine uptake could result in more constant dopamine levels in the brain without the need to modify the levodopa profile in the blood.
- Methylphenidate a relatively safe drug used to treat children suffering from Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD) or Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD), is a dopamine transport inhibitor.
- Methylphenidate has been used with levodopa in Parkinson's disease patients, resulting, however, in severe dyskinesia and other motor effects of levodopa on the patients, especially when the two drugs are delivered together.
- Camicioli, et al. “Methylphenidate Increases the Motor Effects of L-Dopa in Parkinson's Disease: a Pilot Study," CHn. Neuropharmacol. 24(4): 208-213, 2001.
- the detrimental results associated with the co-delivery of levodopa and at least one dopamine transport inhibitor can be avoided and beneficial results achieved. Delivery of dopamine transport inhibitors too early in the levodopa-in-blood release profile enhances the adverse motor effects caused by high levels of dopamine in the brain.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is administered as the dopamine levels start to decrease.
- the invention provides dosage forms comprising levodopa and at least one dopamine transport inhibitor.
- the administration of the dopamine transport inhibitor may be delayed such that release coincides with the time the dopamine concentration level starts to decrease.
- the dopamine transport inhibitor is a compound capable of delaying the dopamine transporter from removing dopamine from the brain. In other words, the dopamine transport inhibitor precludes or diminishes the removal rate of dopamine by the dopamine transporter, thereby prolonging a concentration of dopamine in the brain.
- Dopamine transporter inhibitors include, but are not limited to, methylphenidate.
- methylphenidate may be present in an amount about 1 mg to about 60 mg, preferably from 1 mg to about 15 mg, more preferably, from about 5 mg to about 10 mg, and most preferably methylphenidate may be present in an amount of about 10 mg per dose.
- a levodopa metabolic precursor like the levodopa ethyl ester of U.S. Pat. No. 5,840,756 may be substituted for some or all of the levodopa in the various embodiments of the invention.
- levodopa is present in an amount from about 50 mg to about 300 mg, preferably from about 100 mg to about 200 mg and, more preferably, levodopa is present in an amount of about 100 mg to about 150 mg per dose.
- the amount of levodopa may also be adjusted accordingly if any of the other formulations described below are adapted for use in the instant invention.
- the timing of the administration of the individual ingredients of the composition of the invention is important to achieve the desired leveling of peaks and troughs of dopamine concentrations when treating Parkinson's disease.
- the levodopa, decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, and dopamine transporter inhibitor of the composition may be administered concurrently as a unit dose or co-administered as several doses.
- Each ingredient may be formulated either as an immediate release formulation or sustained release formulation with or without a time delay. The ratio of each ingredient may also vary between the first (and second, if present) immediate-release and the substantially zero-order release dose.
- levodopa may be administered as an immediate-release formulation or a sustained-release delivery formulation wherein the levodopa is released over about 1 to about 4 hours.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may be dosed as an immediate- release drug delivery formulation or a sustained-release delivery formulation (with levodopa or independently) wherein the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is released over about 1 to about 4 hours.
- the dopamine transporter inhibitor is formulated as an immediate- release formulation which releases after about a 2-hour to about 7-hour delay, and preferably after about a 3- to about 5-hour delay.
- the dopamine transporter inhibitor may be formulated as a sustained-release delivery formulation which releases over one to six hours after about a 1 - to about 7-hour delay.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition is formulated for variable dosing, such as customized dosing for individual patients.
- Another aspect of the invention relates to a decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor (e.g., carbidopa or its pro-drug) formulation for extended release of the inhibitor over a prolonged period, optionally at a selected target site, such as a site proximal to the small intestine, e.g., proximal small intestine.
- a decayboxylase enzyme inhibitor e.g., carbidopa or its pro-drug
- levodopa/carbidopa formulations contain fixed levels of both - compounds (e.g., levodopaxarbidopa ratio of 10:1 and 4:1, etc.). A higher frequency of side effects (especially nausea and vomiting) may arise when the levodopaxarbidopa ratio is higher. Studies have also shown that about 75 to 150 mg of carbidopa seems to be needed daily to inhibit the peripheral dopa decarboxylase fully (Jaffe, Adv. Neurol. 2: 161-172, 1973). However, repeated administration of carbidopa was needed to completely inhibit the decarboxylase activity.
- carbidopa has a narrow absorption window and is absorbed mainly in the proximal small intestine. About 70% of an administered dose of carbidopa is absorbed, and gastric emptying of the drug plays an important role in its absorption.
- the instant invention provides an extended release decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor (e.g., carbidopa) formulation that releases the inhibitor at the target absorption site and at a substantially constant rate, thereby significantly inhibiting decarboxylation of levodopa in extracerebral tissues, resulting in increased transport of levodopa to the brain.
- an extended release decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor e.g., carbidopa
- the invention provides a bioadhesive oral dosage form that releases a continuous supply of inhibitor (e.g., carbidopa) to a desired absorption site (e.g., the proximal small intestine), e.g., yielding a consistent carbidopa release to the systemic blood circulation for a prolonged period (e.g., 10-12 hours).
- a continuous supply of carbidopa overnight more effectively inhibits the peripheral dopa decarboxylase.
- Such a strategy can be used in combination with administration of levodopa dosage forms.
- a strategy of pre-dosing with a carbidopa extended-release formulation prior to administration of a levodopa formulation e.g., levodopa-carbidopa extended release tablet
- a levodopa formulation e.g., levodopa-carbidopa extended release tablet
- pre-dosing with the subject carbidopa extended-release formulation prior to medication with levodopa formulation such as levodopa-carbidopa product may also help prevent early morning "off medication" dyskinesias and dystonia.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition increases the bioavailability of the subsequently administered levodopa compositions, by at least about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% or more.
- Bioavailability may be measured by AUCo -24 using any art-recognized methods, such as according to the examples described herein.
- the carbidopa dosage form may be designed to be administered in the evening time following a meal to take advantage of reduced gastric emptying and motility associated with the fed state and sleeping.
- a levodopa formulation e.g., a (multilayer) extended release (tablet) formulation, such as the subject Levodopa/Carbidopa Multilayer Extended Release Tablet 200mg/50mg formulation "D"
- a levodopa formulation e.g., a (multilayer) extended release (tablet) formulation, such as the subject Levodopa/Carbidopa Multilayer Extended Release Tablet 200mg/50mg formulation "D”
- the subject carbidopa trilayer extended release tablet e.g., the 100 mg
- this aspect of the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
- a pharmaceutical composition comprising: a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient.
- the pharmaceutical composition further comprises: (1) one or more bioadhesive layers, (2) one or more bioadhesive compositions incorporated in the pharmaceutical composition, or (3) one or more bioadhesive compositions incorporated as layers in the pharmaceutical composition, for example, as a multilayer tablet.
- These subject pharmaceutical compositions may be useful for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of levodopa or its metabolic precursor thereof.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitors formulated for immediate release, e.g., to release an effective amount of decarboxylase inhibitor within about 1-2 hours of administration, or even within 30 minutes of administration.
- less than 50%, less than 25%, less than 15% or even less than 10% of the decarboxylase inhibitor in the formulation is released within the first hour, or even the first two hours, after administration of the formulation.
- less than 50%, less than 25%, less than 15% or even less than 10% of the decarboxylase inhibitor in the formulation is released within the first hour, or even the first two hours, after release of the decarboxylase inhibitor commences.
- the pharmaceutical composition may release the effective components (e.g., decarboxylase inhibitor, such as carbidopa) at a substantially linear / constant rate over the entire predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient.
- the release rate is not constant or linear over the entire period of time, it is at least linear / constant over one or more portions of the entire period, with rates being the same or different between different portions.
- the release profile of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor during the entire predetermined extended period of time may take numerous forms, so long as the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to provide a substantially constant effective plasma concentration (e.g., the highest serum concentration is no more than 50% or 100% greater than the lowest serum concentration) during a period starting at least about 4 hours after administration to the patient, at least about 5 hours after administration to the patient, at least about 6 hours after administration to the patient, at least about 7 hours after administration to the patient, or at least about 8 hours after administration to the patient.
- a substantially constant effective plasma concentration e.g., the highest serum concentration is no more than 50% or 100% greater than the lowest serum concentration
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to provide a substantially constant effective plasma concentration, no later than about 4 hours before the patient's waking, no later than about 5 hours before the patient's waking, no later than about 6 hours before the patient's waking, no later than about 7 hours before the patient's waking, no later than about 8 hours before the patient's waking, etc.
- the release rate of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may be controlled to last a desired period of time (e.g., 6 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, 12 hours, etc.) at a substantially constant rate.
- the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor may be delayed until several hours (e.g., 1 hr, 2 hrs, 3 hrs, 4 hrs, 5 hrs, 6 hrs, 7 hrs, etc.) after the patient goes to sleep, and/or becomes substantially constant at least several hours (e.g., 2 hrs, 3 hrs, 4 hrs, 5 hrs, 6 hrs, 7 hrs, etc.) before the patient wakes up.
- the predetermined extended period of time (e.g., between the administration of the composition before the patient goes to sleep, and when (or shortly after) the patient wakes up) is about 7-14 hours, 8-14 hours, or about 9-13 hours, or about 10-12 hours, or about 1 1 hours.
- the administration time need not be just before sleeping. For example, it can be shortly before, with, or right after the last meal of the day, or some other convenient time.
- a preferred administration time is shortly before, with, or right after the last meal of the day, in order to take advantage of reduced gastric emptying and motility associated with the fed state and sleeping.
- the formulation is designed to be administered at a time such that, whether release of the decarboxylase inhibitor begins immediately or is delayed for a period of time, the decarboxylase inhibitor is released while the patient sleeps (e.g., commencing at least 2 hrs, 3 hrs, 4 hrs, 5 hrs, 6 hrs, 7 hrs, etc. before the patient wakes) continuing up to about a time where the patient wakes, or even for a period of time thereafter, such that there is an effective plasma level of the decarboxylase inhibitor in the patient when the patient awakens.
- the period of release of the decarboxylase inhibitor is extended or delayed for a formulation designed to be taken substantially in advance of the onset of sleep (e.g., at dinner) as compared to a formulation designed to be taken just before onset of sleep.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is released at a substantially constant rate over the predetermined extended period of time.
- substantially constant rate refers to a release rate that does not substantially vary, e.g., with no more than about 50% or 100% variations between the highest and lowest rates.
- the subject decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated in a partially exposed core between two bioadhesive layers.
- the first and third layer may be bioadhesive layers, each covering at least a portion of the second layer- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor core.
- the inhibitor may be released through the partial surface not covered by the bioadhesive layers.
- composition need not be formulated as a tablet.
- two bioadhesive layers partially cover the inhibitor core.
- a cylinder-shaped or bead-shaped core may be covered by 2 patches / layers of bioadhesive layers, which bioadhesive layers can, but need not, be of the same size or symmetrically positioned with respect to the core.
- the exposed surface of the core (and thus the inhibitor release rate) may be substantially constant or may change over time (e.g., increase or descrease, in a linear or non-linear fashion, etc.), as the core erodes.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition is selectively released at a target absorption site, such as the proximal small intestine, through the use of appropriate bioadhesive layers.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition further comprises a sleep-inducing agent. This is useful if the subject composition is to be administered to the patient before sleeping. Any sleep-inducing agent(s) described herein may be used for this purpose.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition further comprises one or more of: a dopaminergic and anti-cholinergic agent, such as amantadine; an anticholinergic agent, such as trihexyphenidyl, benztropine, ethoproprazine, or procyclidine; a dopamine agonist, such as: apomorphine, bromocriptine, cabergoline, lisuride, pergolide, pramipexole, or ropinirole; a MAO-B (monoamine oxidase B) inhibitor, such as: selegiline or deprenyl; a COMT inhibitor, such as: CGP-28014, entacapone, or tolcapone; a muscle relaxant, such as baclofen; a sedative, such as Clonazepam; an anticonvulsant agent, such as carbamazepine; a dopamine reuptake inhibitor, such as tetrabenazine;
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is carbidopa, a carbidopa prodrug, benserazide, methylphenidate, or a combination thereof.
- the total dose of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is about 25 - 300 mg, or about 75 - 200 mg, or about 100 mg.
- the one or more (bioadhesive) layers may include any of the bioadhesive materials described herein, preferably those that selectively target the lining of small intestine, such as proximal small intestine.
- Exemplary bioadhesive materials may be selected from chitosan, hyaluronic acid, hyaluran, thiomers, poly(methylvinylether-co-malic anhydride), polyamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyvinyl alcohols, carbopols, carbomers, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polyurethanes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends and copolymers thereof.
- the pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more bioadhesive layers including poly(fum
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprise bioadhesive materials having a catechol moiety.
- the bioadhesive materials comprise a mixture of a material and a compound comprising a catechol moiety selected from L-Dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- the bioadhesive materials are selected from polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes, polystyrene, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends, and/or copolymers thereof.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprise bioadhesive material covalently functionalized with a catechol moiety.
- the catechol moiety is derived from L-dopa, D-dopa, dopamine, or carbidopa.
- the biolayers comprise SPHEROMERTM I, SPHEROMERTM II, SPHEROMERTM III, and/or SPHEROMERTM IV.
- the one or more bioadhesive layers comprises an additive that stabilizes the bioadhesive layers from erosion, dissolution or both, wherein at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive layers remain after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- the bioadhesive layers comprise an additive selected from one or more of a polyanhydride, an acidic component, a metal compound, a stabilizing polymer and a hydrophobic component.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition is suitable for human treatment, or for veterinary treatment of a non-human animal.
- non-human animal include both domestic animals and livestock, raised either as laboratory animals, pets or zoo animals, or for commercial purposes. Examples are rodents such as mice, rats, hamsters, or rabbits; dogs; cats; cattle; horses; sheep; hogs; and goats.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method for making the pharmaceutical compositions with one or more features as described above.
- one aspect of the invention provides a method of making a pharmaceutical composition, which may be useful for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising combining the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor with one or more bioadhesive layers into a single dosage form.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of levodopa.
- the pharmaceutical composition is substantially free of immediate release formulation of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitors.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to provide a constant effective plasma concentration starting at least about 4 hours after administration to the patient.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a method for using the pharmaceutical compositions with one or more features as described above, in treating a movement disorder, such as Parkinson's disease.
- one aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a patient, such as one suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising administering to the patient any of the subject pharmaceutical compositions described herein that comprises (1) a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, and (2) one or more bioadhesive layers for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site.
- a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient
- bioadhesive layers for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site.
- the pharmaceutical composition is administered before the patient goes to sleep.
- the pharmaceutical composition is administered shortly before, with, or after the patient's last meal before going to sleep.
- the method further comprises administering a second pharmaceutical composition comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof about 6-12 hours after, about 7-11 hrs after, about 8-10 hrs after, about 9 hrs after administration of the extended release decarboxylase inhibitor formulation, etc.
- a packaged pharmaceutical composition which may be useful for the treatment of a patient suffering from Parkinson's disease and/or another movement disorder, comprising: (1) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to provide an effective plasma concentration of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor over a predetermined extended period of time after the administration of the pharmaceutical composition to the patient, and one or more bioadhesive layers for preferentially targeting the release of the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor at a target absorption site; and (2) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising levodopa or a metabolic precursor thereof.
- the first pharmaceutical composition acts as a pre-dose, which preferably is substantially free of levodopa, and/or substantially free of immediate release formulation of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitors.
- the decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor is formulated to provide a constant effective plasma concentration starting at least about 4 hours after administration to the patient.
- the first and/or the second pharmaceutical compositions are packaged separately as individual doses.
- the package may comprise at least one dose each of the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions.
- the first and the second pharmaceutical compositions are differentiated by color, shape, marking, imprinting, and/or size, etc.
- the subject packaged pharmaceutical composition may further comprise an instruction that instructs a patient to take the first pharmaceutical composition before sleep, and to take the second pharmaceutical composition after waking.
- mice All the subject preparations and methods can be used as part of the treatments for human and/or other animal subjects.
- other animal subjects to which the invention is applicable extend to both domestic animals and livestock, raised either as laboratory animals, pets or zoo animals, or for commercial purposes. Examples are rodents such as mice, rats, hamsters, or rabbits; dogs; cats; cattle; horses; sheep; hogs; and goats.
- the method includes administering, conjointly with the subject pharmaceutical composition, one or more of other therapeutic compositions useful for the treat-ment of diseases, for which levodopa/carbidopa or pramipexole is indicated for.
- levodopa/carbidopa or pramipexole may be co-administered with a dopamine precursor, a dopaminergic agent, a dopaminergic and anti-cholinergic agent, an anti-cholinergic agent, a dopamine agonist, a MAO-B (monoamine oxidase B) inhibitor, a COMT (catechol O- methyltransferase) inhibitor, a muscle relaxant, a sedative, an anticonvulsant agent, a dopamine reuptake inhibitor, a dopamine blocker, a ⁇ -blocker, a carbonic anhydrase inhibitor, a narcotic agent
- the method includes administering, conjointly with the pharmaceutical composition, one or more of physical therapy, occupational therapy, or speech / language therapy.
- An agent to be administered conjointly with a subject compound may be formulated together with a subject compound as a single pharmaceutical preparation, e.g., as a pill or other medicament including both agents, or may be administered as a separate pharmaceutical preparation.
- Another aspect of the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical composition, comprising the subject pharmaceutical composition in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent a movement disorder in a patient, which may additionally include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and instructions (written and/or pictorial) describing the use of the formulation for treating the patient, wherein the patient suffers from ataxia, corticobasal ganglionic degeneration (CBGD), dyskinesia, dystonia, tremors, hereditary spastic paraplegia, Huntington's disease, multiple system atrophy, myoclonus, Parkinson's disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, restless legs syndrome, Rett syndrome, spasticity, Sydenham's chorea, other choreas, athetosis, ballism, stereotypy, tardive dyskinesia/dystonia, tics, Tourette's syndrome, olivopontocerebellar atrophy (OPCA), diffuse Lewy body disease, hemibalismus, hemi-facial spa
- the movement disorder is Parkinson's disease.
- adrenergic refers to neurotransmitters or neuromodulators chemically related to adrenaline (epinephrine) or to neurons which release such adrenergic mediators. Examples are dopamine, norepinephrine, and epinephrine. Such agents are also referred to as catecholamines, which are derived from the amino acid tyrosine.
- modified refers to monomers or polymers which have undergone a chemical reaction.
- bioadhesives or “bioadhesive materials” refer to the bioadhesive polymers and bioadhesive compositions disclosed herein, including materials that contain one or more additional components in addition to the bioadhesive polymers and bioadhesive compositions of the invention.
- Bioadhesives also include blends of one or more bioadhesive polymers or blends disclosed herein with one or more other (bioadhesive or non- bioadhesive) polymers or blends.
- bioadhesive polymers is used to refer to both compositions where the polymer itself is bioadhesive, as well as compositions where a non- or poorly bioadhesive polymer is combined with a compound that imparts bioadhesive properties to the composition as a whole, as described in detail herein.
- Bioadhesive polymers is also used to refer to specific polymer compositions including polyanhydride copolymers of fumaric anhydride and sebacic anhydride reacted through polycondensation (as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,955,096 to Mathiowitz et al. and for an example SPHEROMERTM I[p(FASA) (1 :4)]), anhydride oligomers, such as fumaric anhydride oligomer, and metal oxides, such as CaO, ferric oxide, magnesium oxide, titanium dioxide (as described in U.S. Patent No.
- L-DOPA-BMA L-DOPA grafted onto butadiene maleic anhydride at 95% substitution efficiency
- carbidopa grafted onto butadiene maleic anhydride as described in PCT/US06/24352, Spherics, Inc., and, for an example, SPHEROMERTM IV.
- bioadhesion generally refers to the ability of a material to adhere to a biological surface for an extended period of time. Bioadhesion requires a contact between the bioadhesive material and a surface, for example, where the bioadhesive material penetrates into the crevice of the surface ⁇ e.g. tissue and/or mucus) and chemical bonds form. The amount of bioadhesive force is affected by both the nature of the bioadhesive material, such as a polymer, and the nature of the surrounding medium. Adhesion of materials to tissues may be achieved by (i) physical or mechanical bonds and/or (ii) secondary chemical bonds ⁇ e.g., ionic).
- Physical or mechanical bonds can result from deposition and inclusion of the adhesive material in the crevices of the mucus or the folds of the mucosa.
- Secondary chemical bonds, contributing to bioadhesive properties consist of dispersive interactions ⁇ e.g., Van der Waals interactions) and stronger specific interactions, which include hydrogen bonds and ionic bonds.
- the hydrophilic functional groups responsible for forming hydrogen bonds are hydroxyl (-OH) and carboxylic acid groups (-COOH).
- Bioadhesive forces are measured in units of N/m 2 . These forces are preferably determined by methods defined in U.S. Patent No. 6,197,346 to Mathiowitz et al.
- a Texture Analyser such as the TA-TX2 Texture Analyser (Stable Micro Systems, Haslemer, Surrey, UK).
- TA-TX2 Texture Analyser Stable Micro Systems, Haslemer, Surrey, UK.
- a mucoadhesive tablet is attached to a probe on the texture analyzer and lowered until it contacts pig gastric tissue, which is attached to a tissue holder and exposed to liquid at 37 0 C to simulate gastric medium. A force is applied for a set period of time and then the probe is lifted at a set rate.
- biogenic amines refers to a class of neurotransmitters which includes catecholamines (e.g., dopamine, norepinephrine, and epinephrine) and serotonin.
- catecholamines e.g., dopamine, norepinephrine, and epinephrine
- serotonin e.g., serotonin
- blend refers to a mixture of two or more polymers or a mixture of one or more polymers with one or more low molecular weight additives containing a catechol functionality.
- the mixture can be homogeneous or heterogeneous.
- catechol refers to a compound with a molecular formula of C 6 H 6 O 2 and the following structure:
- Bioadhesive materials contain a polymer with a catechol functionality or a polymer blended with catechol or a catechol derivative.
- the molecular weight of the bioadhesive materials and percent substitution of the polymer with the aromatic compound may vary greatly. The degree of substitution varies based on the desired adhesive strength, it may be as low as 10%, 20%, 25%, 50%, or up to 100% substitution.
- On average at least 50% of the monomers in the polymeric backbone are substituted with at least one aromatic group.
- 75-95% of the monomers in the backbone are substituted with at least one aromatic group or a side chain containing an aromatic group.
- the resulting bioadhesive material is a polymer with a molecular weight ranging from about 1 to 2,000 kDa, preferably 1 to 1 ,000 kDa, more preferably 10 to 1,000 kDa, most preferably 100 to 1,000 kDa.
- the ratio of polymer to catechol can be varied in order to vary the bioadhesive properties of the material.
- the catechol or catechol derivative can be present in an amount from about 0.5% to about 95% by weight of the polymer, typically about 10% to about 75%, preferably about 10% to about 50% and more preferably about 10% to about 30%.
- a polymer may be functionalized by covalently attaching catechol moieties or compounds comprising catechol moieties.
- a compound comprising a catechol moiety may be blended with a polymer to form a simple mixture with no covalent association between the catechol moieties and the polymer.
- catecholamines refers to neurotransmitters that have a catechol ring (e.g., a 3,4-dihydroxylated benzene ring). Examples are dopamine, norepinephrine, and epinephrine.
- cholinergic refers to neurotransmitters or neuromodulators chemically related to choline or to neurons which release such cholinergic mediators.
- DFL Degree of Fluctuation
- C max means maximum plasma concentration of pramipexole achieved by the ingestion of the composition of the invention or the t.i.d comparator.
- C m i n means minimum plasma concentration of pramipexole achieved by the ingestion of the composition of the invention or the t.i.d comparator.
- C avg as used herein means average plasma concentration of pramipexole achieved by the ingestion of the composition of the invention or the t.i.d comparator.
- C avg is calculated by AUCo -24 over a 24 hours intervals divided by 24.
- T max means the time to achieve maximum plasma concentrations produced by ingestion of of the composition of the invention or the t.i.d comparator.
- AUC 0-24 as used herein means the area under the plasma concentration-time curve, as calculated by the trapezoidal rule over the 24 hour interval for all the formulations.
- C 1n J 11 and “trough levels” should be considered synonyms.
- C 1T , ax " and “peak levels” should be considered synonyms.
- dopaminergic refers to neurotransmitters or neuromodulators chemically related to dopamine or to neurons which release such dopaminergic mediators.
- dopamine refers to an adrenergic neurotransmitter, as is known in the art.
- ED 50 means the dose of a drug which produces 50% of its maximum response or effect.
- an "effective amount" of, e.g., a movement disorder pharmaceutical composition, with respect to the subject method of treatment refers to an amount of the pharmaceutical composition in a preparation which, when applied as part of the subject dosage regimen brings about the desired correction / suppression of the movement disorder (e.g., dyskinesis and/or bradykinesis) according to clinically acceptable standards.
- the desired correction / suppression of the movement disorder e.g., dyskinesis and/or bradykinesis
- LD 50 means the dose of a drug which is lethal in 50% of test subjects.
- lethal therapeutic index refers to the therapeutic index of a drug defined as LD 50 /ED 50 .
- metabolites refers to active derivatives produced upon introduction of a compound into a biological milieu, such as a patient.
- oral means suitable for oral, including peroral and intra-oral (e.g., sublingual or buccal) administration, but tablets of the present invention are adapted primarily for peroral administration, i.e., for swallowing, typically whole or broken, with the aid of water or other drinkable fluid.
- a "patient,” “individual,” or “subject” to be treated by the subject method can mean either a human or non-human animal.
- prevent means reducing the probability / risk of developing a condition in a subject (e.g., a human), or delaying the onset of a condition in the subject, or lessening the severity of one or more symptoms of a condition (e.g., a movement disorder) that may develop in the subject, or any combination thereof.
- a condition e.g., a movement disorder
- prodrug is intended to encompass compounds which, under physiologic conditions, are converted into the therapeutically active agents of the present invention.
- a common method for making a prodrug is to include selected moieties which are hydrolyzed under physiologic conditions to reveal the desired molecule.
- the prodrug is converted by an enzymatic activity of the host animal.
- protecting group means temporary substituents which protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations.
- protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively.
- the field of protecting group chemistry has been reviewed (Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P. G. M. Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1991).
- SeD 50 means the dose of a drug which is produces a particular side-effect in 50% of test subjects.
- side-effect therapeutic index refers to the therapeutic index of a drug defined as SeD 5O /ED 5 o.
- a “subject” herein is an animal of any species, preferably mammalian, most preferably human.
- Conditions and disorders in a subject for which a particular agent is said herein to be “indicated” are not restricted to conditions and disorders for which the agent has been expressly approved by a regulatory authority, but also include other conditions and disorders known or believed by a physician to be amenable to treatment with the agent.
- Solid fraction is the ratio of absolute to apparent density of a compact of the starch.
- a “compact” herein is a compressed tablet, prepared for example on a tablet press, consisting only of a sample of starch for which it is desired to measure tensile strength.
- a “solid fraction representative of the tablet” is a solid fraction selected to be similar to the solid fraction of tablets prepared according to the invention. Typically a solid fraction of about 0.75 to about 0.85, illustratively 0.8, will be selected.
- statically significant means that the obtained results are not likely to be due to chance fluctuations at the specified level of probability.
- the level of significance equal to 0.05 and 0.01 means that the probability of error is 5 out of 100 and 1 out of 100, respectively.
- transdermal patch is meant a system capable of delivery of a drug to a patient via the skin, or any suitable external surface, including mucosal membranes, such as those found inside the mouth.
- delivery systems generally comprise a flexible backing, an adhesive and a drug retaining matrix, the backing protecting the adhesive and matrix and the adhesive holding the whole on the skin of the patient.
- the drug-retaining matrix delivers drug to the skin, the drug then passing through the skin into the patient's system.
- treat means to counteract a medical condition (e.g., a movement disorder) to the extent that the medical condition is improved according to clinically acceptable standard(s).
- a medical condition e.g., a movement disorder
- to treat a movement disorder means to improve the movement disorder or relieve symptoms of the particular movement disorder in a patient, wherein the improvement and relief are evaluated with a clinically acceptable standardized test (e.g., a patient self- assessment scale) and/or an empirical test (e.g., PET scan).
- a clinically acceptable standardized test e.g., a patient self- assessment scale
- an empirical test e.g., PET scan
- water-soluble herein means having solubility of at least about 10 mg/ml.
- solubility herein means solubility in water at 20-25°C at any physiologically acceptable pH, for example at any pH in the range of about 4 to about 8.
- reference herein to solubility in water pertains to the salt, not to the free base form of pramipexole.
- the present invention contemplates modes of treatment and/or prophylaxis (e.g., treating or preventing the development of symptoms in high-risk populations), which utilize one or more of the subject dosage forms for decreasing or overcoming the defects in a movement disorder patient.
- modes of treatment and/or prophylaxis e.g., treating or preventing the development of symptoms in high-risk populations
- the improvement and/or restoration of mental or physical state in an organism has positive behavioral, social, and psychological consequences.
- Parkinson's disease is the second most common neurodegenerative disorder, affecting nearly 1 million people in North America.
- the disease is characterized by symptoms such as muscle rigidity, tremor and bradykinesia.
- Early studies of Parkinson's disease showed unusual inclusions in the cytoplasm of neurons (i.e., Lewy bodies), occurring predominantly in the substantia nigra, which innervate the striatal region of the forebrain.
- Lewy bodies were also found in other neurodegenerative conditions, the presence of Lewy bodies in Parkinson's disease is accompanied by cell loss in the substantia nigra. This cell loss is considered to be the defining pathological feature of Parkinson's disease.
- Parkinson's disease incidence leading to the search for environmental factors (Olanow and Tatton, Ann. Rev. Neurosci. 22: 123-144, 1998).
- MPTP l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridine
- Parkinson's disease may be caused by environmental factors (e.g., toxins and causative agents).
- environmental factors e.g., toxins and causative agents.
- Parkinson's disease has also identified genes associated with Parkinson's disease (Mizuno et al, Biomed. Pharmacother. 53(3): 109-116, 1999; Dunnett and Bjorklund, Nature 399 (6738 Suppl): A32-A39, 1999); namely, the ⁇ -synuclein gene (Polymeropouos et al, Science 276: 2045-2047, 1997), the parkin gene (Kitada et al, Nature 392: 605-608, 1998), and the UCH-Ll thiol protease gene (Leroy et al, Nature 395: 451-452, 1998).
- Parkinson's disease Mizuno et al, Biomed. Pharmacother. 53(3): 109-116, 1999; Dunnett and Bjorklund, Nature 399 (6738 Suppl): A32-A39, 1999
- ⁇ -synuclein gene Polymeropouos et al, Science 276: 20
- Parkinson's disease is associated with the progressive loss of dopamine neurons in the ventral mesencephalon of the substantia nigra (Shoulson, Science 282: 1072- 1074, 1998), which innervates the major motor-control center of the forebrain, the striatum.
- a gradual decline in the number of neurons and dopamine content of the basal ganglia is normally associated with increasing age, progressive dopamine loss is pronounced in people suffering from Parkinson's disease, resulting in the appearance of symptoms when about 70-80% of striatal dopamine and 50% of nigral dopamine neurons are lost (Dunnett and Bjorklund, supra). This loss of dopamine-producing neurons resulting in a dopamine deficiency is believed to be responsible for the motor symptoms of Parkinson's disease.
- Parkinson's disease Although the cause of dopaminergic cell death remains unknown, it is believed that dopaminergic cell death is affected by a combination of necrotic and apoptotic cell death.
- Mechanisms and signals responsible for the progressive degeneration of nigral dopamine neurons in Parkinson's disease have been proposed (Olanow et al, Ann. Neurol. 44: Sl -S 196, 1998), and include oxidative stress (from the generation of reactive oxygen species), mitochondrial dysfunction, excitotoxicity, calcium imbalance, inflammatory changes and apoptosis as contributory and interdependent factors in Parkinson's disease neuronal cell death.
- Apoptosis ⁇ i.e., programmed cell death
- accelerated apoptosis is believed to underlie many neurodegenerative diseases, including Parkinson's disease (Barinaga, Science 281: 1303-1304, 1998; Mochizuki et al., J. Neurol. ScL 137: 120- 123, 1996; and Oo et al, Neuroscience 69: 893-901, 1995).
- apoptotic death can be initiated by a variety of external stimuli, and the biochemical nature of the intracellular apoptosis effectors is at least partially understood.
- a composition of the invention is administered in combination therapy with one or more additional drugs or prodrugs.
- the term "combination therapy” or “conjoint therapy” herein means a treatment regimen wherein the agent provided by the composition of the invention and a second agent are administered individually or together, sequentially or simultaneously, in such a way as to provide a beneficial effect from co-action of these therapeutic agents.
- beneficial effect can include, but is not limited to, pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic co-action of the therapeutic agents.
- Combination therapy can, for example, enable administration of a lower dose of one or both agents than would normally be administered during monotherapy, thus decreasing risk or incidence of adverse effects associated with higher doses.
- combination therapy can result in increased therapeutic effect at the normal dose of each agent in monotherapy.
- compositions of the invention can be especially suited to combination therapies, particularly where the second agent is one that is, or can be, administered once daily.
- the second agent is one that is, or can be, administered once daily.
- the two components of the combination therapy can be administered in separate dosage forms or in coformulation, i.e., in a single dosage form
- the second agent can be administered by any suitable route and in any pharmaceutically acceptable dosage form, for example by a route and/or in a dosage form other than the present composition.
- both components of the combination therapy are formulated together in a single dosage form.
- the second components of the subject combination therapy include L-dopa, selegiline, apomorphine and anticholinergics.
- L-dopa (levo-dihydroxy-phenylalanine) is a dopamine precursor which can cross the blood-brain barrier and be converted to dopamine in the brain.
- L-dopa has a short half life in the body and it is typical after long use (i.e., after about 4-5 years) for the effect of L-dopa to become sporadic and unpredictable, resulting in fluctuations in motor function, dyskinesias and psychiatric side effects. Additionally, L- dopa can cause B vitamin deficiencies to arise.
- levodopa The gastrointestinal absorption of orally administered levodopa depends on the gastrointestinal transit rates as absorption occurs primarily in the proximal third of the intestine (duodenum/jejunum) and not in the stomach (Rivera-Calimlim et al. Europ. J. Clin. Invest. 1, 1313-1320, 1971). Therefore a delayed release dosage form containing levodopa/carbidopa or levodopa/carbidopa/entacapone with pramipexole will allow the levodopa to be released in the target proximal intestine region and release levodopa is a sustained manner similar to enteral infusion of levodopa.
- the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising pramipexole and levodopa (optionally also carbidopa or a prodrug thereof) for treating PD and other related movement disorders.
- the invention also provides methods of using such pharmaceutical compositions for treating PD and other related movement disorders. See Examples 86-89 of WO 2007/002516.
- Selegiline (Deprenyl, Eldepryl) has been used as an alternative to L-dopa, and acts by reducing the breakdown of dopamine in the brain. Unfortunately, selegiline becomes ineffective after about nine months of use.
- Apomorphine a dopamine receptor agonist, has been used to treat Parkinson's disease, although is causes severe vomiting when used on its own, as well as skin reactions, infection, drowsiness and some psychiatric side effects.
- Systemically administered anticholinergic drugs have also been used to treat Parkinson's disease and act by reducing the amount of acetylcholine produced in the brain and thereby redress the dopamine/acetylcholine imbalance present in Parkinson's disease.
- systemically administered anticholinergics develop serious neuropsychiatric side effects, including hallucinations, as well as dyskinetic movements, and other effects resulting from wide anticholinergic distribution, including vision effects, difficulty swallowing, dry mouth, and urine retention. See e.g. Playfer, Parkinson's Disease, Postgrad Med J 73: 257-264, 1997 and Nadeau, Parkinson's Disease, J Am Ger Soc 45: 233-240, 1997.
- Newer drug refinements and developments include direct-acting dopamine agonists, slow-release L-dopa formulations, inhibitors of the dopamine degrading enzymes catechol-O- methyltransferase (COMT) and monoamine oxidase B (MAO-B), and dopamine transport blockers.
- These treatments enhance central dopaminergic neurotransmission during the early stages of Parkinson's disease, ameliorate symptoms associated with Parkinson's disease, and temporarily improve the quality of life.
- L-dopa for treating Parkinson's disease, the benefits accorded by these dopaminergic therapies are temporary, and their efficacy declines with disease progression.
- thalamotomy a method for the treatment of Parkinson's disease
- neurosurgical intervention such as thalamotomy, pallidotomy, and deep brain stimulation.
- the thalamic outputs of the basal ganglia are an effective lesion target for the control of tremor ⁇ i.e., thalamotomy).
- Thalamotomy destroys part of the thalamus, a brain region involved in movement control.
- Unilateral stereotactic thalamotomy has proven to be effective for controlling contralateral tremor and rigidity, but carries a risk of hemiparesis.
- Bilateral thalamotomy carries an increased risk of speech and swallowing disorders resulting.
- Pallidotomy surgical ablation of part of the globus pallidus (a basal ganglia), has also be used with some success.
- Pallidotomy is performed by inserting a wire probe into the globus pallidus and heating the probe to destroy nearby tissue.
- Pallidotomy is most useful for the treatment of peak-dose diskinesias and for dystonia that occurs at the end of a dose.
- Clinical trials have shown that administration of antioxidative agents vitamin E and deprenyl provided little or no neuroprotective function (Shoulson et al, Ann. Neurol. 43: 318-325, 1998).
- Glutamate-receptor blockers and neuronal nitric oxide synthase (NOS) inhibitors have been proposed as therapies for Parkinson's disease; however, no experimental results from human studies have yet been published (Rodriguez, Ann. Neurol. 44: S175-S188, 1998).
- GDNF glial cell line-derived neurotrophic factor
- neurotrophic factors which may have therapeutic value have been proposed based on in vitro and animal model systems, including neurturin, basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF), brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF), neurotrophins 3 and 4/5, ciliary neurotrophic factor and transforming growth factor ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ ).
- bFGF basic fibroblast growth factor
- BDNF brain-derived neurotrophic factor
- TGF- ⁇ transforming growth factor ⁇
- dopaminergic neurons for use in the transplantation process have been tried in animal experiments, including the use of mesencephalic dopamine neurons obtained from human embryo cadavers, immature neuronal precursor cells (i.e., neuronal stem cells), dopamine secreting non-neuronal cells, terminally differentiated teratocarcinoma- derived neuronal cell lines (Dunnett and Bjorkland, supra), genetically modified cells (Raymon et al, Exp. Neurol. 144: 82-91, 1997; and Kang, Mov. Dis.
- Additional therapies are also available, such as physical therapy, occupational therapy, or speech / language therapy.
- Exercise, diet, nutrition, patient/caregiver education, and psychosocial interventions have also been shown to have a positive effect on the mental and/or physical state of a person suffering from Parkinson's disease.
- Various methods of evaluating Parkinson's disease in a patient include Hoehn and Yahr Staging of Parkinson's Disease, Unified Parkinson Disease Rating Scale (UPDRS), and Schwab and England Activities of Daily Living Scale.
- UPDRS Unified Parkinson Disease Rating Scale
- a person suffering from Parkinson's disease should avoid contraindicated and potentially contraindicated drugs such as antipsychotic drugs, Haloperidol (Haldol), Perphenazine (Trilafon), Chlorpromazine (Thorazine), Trifluoperazine (Stelazine), Flufenazine (Prolixin, Permitil) Thiothixene (Navane), Thioridazine (Mellaril); antidepressant drug, combination of Perphenazine and Amitriptyline (Triavil); anti-vomiting drugs, Prochlorperazine (Compazine), Metoclopramide (Reglan, Maxeran), Thiethylperazine (Torecan), Reserpine (Serpasil), Tetrabenazine (Nitoman); blood pressure drug, Alpha- methyldopa (Aldomet); anti-seizure drug, Phenytoin (Dilantin); mood stabilizing drug, lithium; and anti
- Certain embodiments of the invention provides a pharmaceutical preparation comprising an oral dosage formulation in a therapeutically effective amount sufficient to treat movement disorder ⁇ e.g., Parkinson's disease or another movement disorder) in a patient, wherein the dosage formulation, when administered to the patient, provides a treatment regimen characterized by a rapid (immediate) release portion that quickly (e.g., in less than about 2 hours, e.g., in less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min.
- a rapid (immediate) release portion that quickly (e.g., in less than about 2 hours, e.g., in less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or
- a substantially sustained dose boosts effective levodopa concentration to a therapeutically effective level, followed by a substantially sustained dose (zero-order release dose) over at least about 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8, hours, 12 hours, 16 hours, 20 hours, or at least about 24 hours.
- a substantially ascending portion such as a second IR portion, is also provided subsequent to the second zero-order release portion to ensure a rapid drop at the end of the therapeutic regimen cycle ⁇ e.g., at day end, or before the patient goes to bed).
- Certain embodiments of the invention provide a pharmaceutical preparation / dosage formulation provided in the form of a transdermal patch and formulated for sustained release formulation, in a therapeutically effective amount sufficient to treat a movement disorder ⁇ e.g., Parkinson's disease and related movement disorders) in a patient, wherein the dosage formulation, when administered (provided as a patch) to the patient, provides a substantially sustained dose over at least about 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8, hours, 12 hours, 20 hours, or at least about 24 hours.
- a movement disorder ⁇ e.g., Parkinson's disease and related movement disorders
- the first IR portion preferably contains a relatively high ratio of decarboxylase inhibitor ⁇ e.g., carbidopa) / levodopa.
- the ratio is preferably > 1 :4, or 1 :3, 1 :2, 1 :1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1 , 5:1, 6:1 or higher.
- the first IR is formulated to quickly release the compositions such that an effective therapeutic concentration of levodopa is reached in less than about 2 hours ⁇ e.g., in less than about 1 minute, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, etc., or within a range of time bounded by any of these time periods, e.g., 1 min. to 2 hours, 5 min. to 1 hour, 15 to 20 min., etc.) of administration.
- carbidopa may be administered before release of the first IR portion of levodopa, thereby more effectively inhibiting peripheral decarboxylase activity and maximizing the efficacy of the levodopa in the first IR portion.
- a layer comprising carbidopa that is released prior to the first IR portion carbidopa in the IR portion may be formulated to release faster than the levodopa in the IR portion ⁇ e.g., higher release ratio of carbidopa/levodopa), or a bioadhesive layer comprising a high proportion of carbidopa that at least partially undergoes immediate release may be present.
- the carbidopa may be administered as a separate formulation, e.g., together with a levodopa composition coated with a delayed release coating.
- the second sustained release (zero-order release) portion may contain a single uniform composition (e.g., with a uniform ratio of carbidopa / levodopa throughout).
- the second substantially zero order release portion may have a gradient of carbidopa / levodopa ratio from start to finish.
- the ratio may approach 1 :4 at the beginning of the second portion, but drop continuously or discontinuously to, for example, 1 :5, 1 :6, 1 :7, 1 :8, 1:9, 1 :10, 1 :15, or 1 :20, etc.
- the second portion may comprise several sub-portions, each possibly having a unique carbidopa / levodopa ratio.
- the rapidly ascending release portion (such as the second IR portion) may contain no carbidopa, or fairly low ratio of carbidopa / levodopa, such that a rapid drop in effective levodopa concentration may be achieved, thus avoiding the long-tail effect that interferes with patient sleeping or rest.
- the portions of the subject dosage forms may additionally comprise compositions other than pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, exipients, or diluents, etc. (see details below).
- additional compositions may comprise a dopamine transporter inhibitor to be released with a delay.
- additional compositions may also comprise other pharmaceutical compositions useful for treating Parkinson's disease (e.g., in conjoint therapy).
- the above-described dosage preparation can be one wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated in a multiplicity of (sub-)portions or polymeric layers.
- the second sustained release portion may comprise a multiplicity of layers such that the preparation optionally delivers to the patient a sustained release portion with varying ratios of decarboxylase / levodopa over time, even when the amount of released levodopa remains largely constant.
- the subject pharmaceutical composition can be provided in an initial portion (e.g., for immediate-release or IR), followed by a second portion (e.g., substantially zero-order sustained release or SR, optionally with more than one sub-portions or a continuously changing ratio of inhibitor / levodopa), and a final portion (e.g., an additional immediate-release portion), whereby the preparation delivers the initial dose, the second dose, then a final dose over time.
- an initial portion e.g., for immediate-release or IR
- a second portion e.g., substantially zero-order sustained release or SR, optionally with more than one sub-portions or a continuously changing ratio of inhibitor / levodopa
- a final portion e.g., an additional immediate-release portion
- the dose preparation can also be a plurality of beads, each bead including a subject pharmaceutical composition independently having a dissolution profile, which plurality of beads is a variegated population with respect to ratios of the pharmaceutical composition and/or dissolution profile, so as deliver, upon administration, the immediate, sustained, and increasing dose of the subject pharmaceutical composition.
- the dose preparation is generated such that the subject pharmaceutical composition is (i) contained within a nonabsorbable shell that releases the drug at a controlled rate, and (ii) formulated in at least two different dissolution profiles.
- the dosage formulations of the present invention have a side- effect therapeutic index, (SeD 5 o/ED 5O ), such as with respect to the movement disorder, that is at least 2 times greater than the same amount of drug provided in immediate release form, and more preferably at least 5, 10 or even 100 times greater.
- the subject packages, preparations, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for the treatment of movement disorders further comprise one or more therapeutic agents for treating Parkinson's disease selected from a dopamine precursor, such as L-dopa; a dopaminergic agent, such as Levodopa-carbidopa (SINEMET ® , SINEMET CR ® ) or Levodopa-benserazide (PROLOPA ® , MADOP AR ® , MADOPAR HBS ® ); a dopaminergic and anti-cholinergic agent, such as amantadine (SYMMETRYL ® , SYMADINE ® ); an anti-cholinergic agent, such as trihexyphenidyl (ARTANE ® ), benztropine (COGENTIN ® ), ethoproprazine (PARSITAN ® ), or procyclidine (KEMADRIN ® ); a dopamine agonist, such as apomorphine
- the subject treatment may also be used either in conjoint therapy with, or additionally include one or more other pharmaceutical compositions, such as the ones described below.
- US20030045539 discloses a combination treatment of cabergoline and pramipexole provided concurrently to a patient suffering from various central nervous system diseases, and in particular for the treatment of Parkinson's Disease (PD).
- the initial dose of cabergoline is administered to the patient at a dose of 0.5 to 1 mg/patient/day and is adjusted upward at weekly intervals to a therapeutic dosage of 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 mg/patient/day and where the initial dose of pramipexole is started at 0.375 mg/patient/day and is adjusted upward every 5 to 7 days to a therapeutic dosage of 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 mg/patient/day.
- At least one portion of the subject pharmaceutical composition may additional comprise cabergoline and pramipexole for treating Parkinson's disease.
- US20040166159 discloses a pharmaceutical dosage forms having immediate and controlled release properties that contain an aromatic amino acid decarboxylase (AAAD) inhibitor (such as carbidopa), levodopa, and optionally a catechol-O- methyl transferase (COMT) inhibitor, for the treatment of medical conditions associated with reduced dopamine levels in a patient's brain.
- the dosage form may comprise up to about 1000 mg, or about 20-500 mg, about 50-500 mg, or about 100-200 mg of COMT inhibitor.
- the COMT inhibitor may be contained only within the immediate release component, or only within the sustained release component, or both.
- the COMT inhibitor may be CGP-28014, entacapone, or tolcapone.
- the dosage form may further comprise one or more drugs such as anticholinergics, beta 2-agonists, cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors, dopamine receptor agonists, monoamine oxidase (MAO) inhibitors, opiate delta receptor agonists, opiate delta receptor antagonists, and N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) antagonists.
- drugs such as anticholinergics, beta 2-agonists, cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors, dopamine receptor agonists, monoamine oxidase (MAO) inhibitors, opiate delta receptor agonists, opiate delta receptor antagonists, and N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) antagonists.
- drugs such as anticholinergics, beta 2-agonists, cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors, dopamine receptor agonists, monoamine oxidase (MAO) inhibitors, opiate delta receptor agonists, opiate
- the dosage form may further comprise one or more drugs selected from albuterol, alpha-lipoic acid, amantadine, andropinirole, apomorphine, baclofen, biperiden, benztropine, bromocriptine, budipine, cabergoline, clozapine, deprenyl, dextromethorphan, dihydroergokryptine, dihydrolipoic acid, eliprodil, eptastigmine, ergoline, formoterol, galanthamine, lazabemide, lysuride, mazindol, memantine, mofegiline, orphenadrine, pergolide, pirbuterol, pramipexole, propentofylline, procyclidine, rasagiline, remacemide, riluzole, rimantadine, ropinirole, salmeterol, selegiline, spheramine, terguride, and trihex
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating dystonia selected from an anti- cholinergic agent, such as trihexyphenidyl (ARTANE ® ), benztropine (COGENTIN ® ), ethoproprazine (P ARSIT AN ® ), or procyclidine (KEMADRIN ® ); a dopaminergic agent, such as Levodopa-carbidopa (SINEMET ® , SINEMET CR ® ) or Levodopa-benserazide (PROLOP A ® , MADOP AR ® , MADOPAR HBS ); a muscle relaxant, such as baclofen (LIORESAL ® ); a sedative, such as Clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® ); an anticonvulsant agent, such as carbamazepine (TEGRET
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating tremor selected from a ⁇ -blocker, such as propranolol (INDERAL ® , INDERAL-LA ® ); an anticonvulsant agent, such as primidone (MYSOLINE ® ); or a carbonic anhydrase inhibitor, such as acetalzolamide (DIAMOX ® ) or methazolamide (NEPTAZANE ® ).
- a ⁇ -blocker such as propranolol (INDERAL ® , INDERAL-LA ®
- an anticonvulsant agent such as primidone (MYSOLINE ® )
- a carbonic anhydrase inhibitor such as acetalzolamide (DIAMOX ® ) or methazolamide (NEPTAZANE ® ).
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating myoclonus selected from a sedative, such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® ); or an anticonvulsant agent, such as valproic acid (EPIVAL ® ).
- a sedative such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® )
- an anticonvulsant agent such as valproic acid (EPIVAL ® ).
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating chorea selected from a dopamine blocker, such as haloperidol (HALDOL ® ); or a dopamine reuptake inhibitor, such as tetrabenazine (NITOMAN ® ).
- a dopamine blocker such as haloperidol (HALDOL ® )
- a dopamine reuptake inhibitor such as tetrabenazine (NITOMAN ® ).
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating restless leg syndrome selected from a dopaminergic, such as Levodopa-carbidopa (SINEMET ® , SINEMET CR ® ) or Levodopa-benserazide (PROLOP A ® , MADOP AR ® , MADOPAR HBS ® ); a sedative, such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® ); a dopamine agonists, such as bromocriptine (PARLODEL ® ), pergolide (PERMAX ), pramipexole (MIRAPEX ® ), or ropinirole (REQUIP ® ); a narcotic agent, such as codeine (TYLENOL # 3 ® ); or a GABAergic agent, such as gabapentin (NEURONTIN ® ).
- a dopaminergic such as Levodopa-carbidopa (S
- the invention further comprises one or more therapeutic agents for treating tics selected from a sedative, such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® ); an alpha antagonist, such as clonidine (CATAPRESS ® ); a dopamine reuptake inhibitor, such as tetrabenazine (NITOMAN ® ); or a dopamine blocker, such as haloperidol (HALDOL ® ) or perphenazine.
- a sedative such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ® ); an alpha antagonist, such as clonidine (CATAPRESS ® ); a dopamine reuptake inhibitor, such as tetrabenazine (NITOMAN ® ); or a dopamine blocker, such as haloperidol (HALDOL ® ) or perphenazine.
- a sedative such as clonazepam (RIVOTRIL ®
- the present invention provides pharmaceutical preparations comprising, as an active ingredient, an enantiomerically enriched preparation of R-(-) amphetamine or a derivative thereof.
- the subject amphetamine compound is formulated in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent a movement disorder in an animal.
- Still another embodiment of the invention relates to the use of enantiomerically enriched preparations of amphetamine compounds for lessening the severity or prophylactically preventing the occurrence of movement disorders in an animal, and thus, altering the mental or physical state of the animal.
- the compounds of the present invention may also be useful for treating and/or preventing memory impairment, e.g., due to a movement disorder.
- levodopa and carbidopa of the subject pharmaceutical composition can be replaced in whole or in part in this invention with appropriate prodrugs, stereoisomers, acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, etc.
- Levodopa prodrugs include any pharmaceutically suitable ester of levodopa such as, but not limited to, the methyl, ethyl, or propyl esters of levodopa, or combinations thereof.
- Levodopa may be in the form of (-)-L- ⁇ - amino- ⁇ -(3,4-dihydroxybenzene) propanoic acid, 3-hydroxy-L-tyrosine ethyl ester, phenylglycine, or a mixture thereof.
- levodopa prodrugs and carbidopa prodrugs as well as additional compositions (such as fillers, organic acids, metals, metal chelators, etc.) that might constitute useful supplements to the backbone levodopa / carbidopa composition. These compositions may be used as the subject pharmaceutical composition.
- US20020151589A1 (incorporated herein by reference) describes a dispersible pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of L- DOPA ethyl ester, a therapeutically effective amount of a decarboxylase inhibitor, a filler, a disintegrant, and a lubricant, and a method of preparing the pharmaceutical composition described herein.
- the filler may be corn starch, glucose, various natural gums, methylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium phosphate, calcium carbonate, calcium sulfate kaolin, sodium chloride, powdered cellulose, sucrose, mannitol and starch, preferably microcrystalline cellulose (with a moisture content of up to about 1.5%, or up to about 5.0%).
- the decarboxylase inhibitor may be carbidopa (with a moisture content of, for example, between 5.0-10.0%, preferably 7.5%) or benserazide.
- the disintegrant may be kaolin, starch, powdered sugar, sodium starch glycolate, crosscarmelose sodium, carboxymethyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose and sodium alginate, preferably pregelatinized starch (with a moisture content of up to about 5, 7, 12, or 14%).
- the lubricant may be talc, sodium stearyl fumarate, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated soybean oil, and polyethylene glycol, preferably magnesium stearate.
- the excipient may be a binding agent such as sorbitol, glucose, xylitol, and mannitol.
- the composition may further comprise an antioxidant such as tocopherol, sodium metabi sulphite, butylated hydroxytoluene, butylated hydroxyanisole, ascorbic acid and sodium ascorbate, preferably sodium metabisulphite.
- an antioxidant such as tocopherol, sodium metabi sulphite, butylated hydroxytoluene, butylated hydroxyanisole, ascorbic acid and sodium ascorbate, preferably sodium metabisulphite.
- Various weight percentages and amounts per dose are also disclosed, and incorporated herein by reference.
- Such levodopa ethyl ester and the other described components may be used as the levodopa composition of the invention.
- US20020192290A1 discloses a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of levodopa and of carbidopa, dispersed in a hydrophilic matrix, the composition further comprising an organic acid.
- the process for preparing the composition, comprising granulation, in particular in a fiuidized bed, of the various components and compression of the granules obtained, is also disclosed.
- the organic acid may be fumaric acid, citric acid, ascorbic acid, maleic acid, glutamic acid, malonic acid and oxalic acid.
- the organic acid may represent from 0.2% to 20% by weight relative to the weight of the composition.
- the hydrophilic matrix (such as hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose) may represent from 10% to 80% by weight relative to the weight of the composition.
- the hydrophilic matrix may also comprise an insoluble substance, such as microcrystalline cellulose.
- US20040028613A1 discloses formulation useful for enhancing peak concentrations in CNS tissues or fluids and for treating, for example, Parkinson's disease, comprises dopamine agonist and at least one delivery enhancing agent.
- the dopamine receptor agonist may be apomorphine or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative thereof, and is administered to the subject in an effective dose of between about 0.25 and 2.0 mg.
- the delivery-enhancing agent(s) is/are selected from: (a) an aggregation inhibitory agent; (b) a charge modifying agent; (c) a pH control agent; (d) a degradative enzyme inhibitory agent; (e) a mucolytic or mucus clearing agent; (f) a ciliostatic agent; (g) a membrane penetration-enhancing agent selected from (i) a surfactant, (ii) a bile salt, (ii) a phospholipid additive, mixed micelle, liposome, or carrier, (iii) an alcohol, (iv) an enamine, (v) an NO donor compound, (vi) a long-chain amphipathic molecule (vii) a small hydrophobic penetration enhancer; (viii) sodium or a salicylic acid derivative; (ix) a glycerol ester of acetoacetic acid (x) a clyclodextrin or beta-cyclodextrin derivative, (xi) a medium
- the delivery-enhancing agent(s) may also be selected from citric acid, sodium citrate, propylene glycol, glycerin, L-ascorbic acid, sodium metabisulfite, edetate disodium, benzalkonium chloride, sodium hydroxide and mixtures thereof.
- US20050070608 discloses a composition useful for treating dopamine disorders, e.g., Parkinson's disease, comprises levodopa, carbidopa, acid and optionally metal chelator or thioether compound.
- the metal chelator may be EDTA, or deferoxamine mesylate.
- the EDTA may be in the form of a salt of a free base, and/or at a concentration of at least about 0.01 mg/ml.
- the acid may be a carboxylic acid, a mineral acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, ascorbic acid, dehydroascorbic acid, acetic acid (ethanoic acid), formic acid (methanoic acid), butyric acid (butanoic acid), benzoic acid, malic acid, propionic acid, epoxysuccinic acid, muconic acid, furanacrylic acid, citramalic acid, capric acid, stearic acid, caproic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, diethylacetic acid, methylbutryic acid, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, nitric acid, and sulfuric acid, but preferably not ascorbic acid.
- the composition does not contain sugar.
- the composition may be a liquid. Preferably, less than 10%, or 5% of the carbidopa has degraded at 25°C after 7 days, or less than 10% of the carbidopa has degraded at 25°C after 30 days, or less than 5% of the carbidopa has degraded at 25°C after 4 days.
- the composition may further comprise an artificial sweetener, such as aspartame.
- the composition may further comprise a preservative, such as sodium benzoate.
- the composition may be clear or translucent.
- prodrugs of carbidopa examples include but not limited to, but not limited to, butyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-dioethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoeth
- R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, - C(O)OR 27 , -C(O)R 27 , -(CR l 6 R l 7 )OC(O)R n and moieties of Formulae (XVII) and (XVIII):
- aryl ring in Formula (XV) is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from halo, CN, OH, Ci -6 alkyl, Ci -6 alkoxy, and -CO 2 R 31 ;
- R 10 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 11 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl, or optionally, R 1 ' and either R 16 or R 17 , together with the atoms to which R 1 ', and either R 16 or R 17 are attached, form a cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring, optionally to which is fused an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted
- R 15 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, and substituted arylalkyl;
- R 16 and R 17 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, carbamoyl, substituted carbomoyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally, R 16 and R 17 together with the carbon atom to which R 16 and R 17 are attached form a cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring; each R 20 and R 21 is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, al
- R 27 is selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 28 and R 29 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and substituted heteroalkyl; and R 31 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl; with the provisos that when X is -OR 10 , R 1 is hydrogen, and R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci- 19 alkyl, C 1 .
- R 10 is not hydrogen or Ci -6 alkyl; and none of R 1 , R 4 , R 5 , R 10 , R 1 1 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 20 , R 21 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , and R 31 comprise a bile acid moiety.
- the prodrug is a compound of Formula (Ia):
- R 1 is selected from hydrogen and the structure of Formula (IX): see above;
- R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, -C(O)OR 27 , -C(O)R 27 , - (CR I6 R 17 )OC(O)R and moieties of Formulae (XVII) and (XVIII): see above; wherein o is 1-3, and the cycloheteroalkyl rings in (XVII) and (XVIII) are optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from halo, CN, NO 2 , OH, Ci -6 alkyl, and Ci -6 alkoxy; or
- R 10 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 1 1 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl, or optionally, R 11 and either R 16 or R 17 , together with the atoms to which R 11 , and either R 16 or R 17 are attached, form a first cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring, to which an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroal
- R 16 or R 17 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyd, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally, R 16 or R 17 together with the carbon atoms to which R 16 or R 17 are attached form a cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring;
- R 27 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 28 and R 29 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and substituted heteroalkyl; and
- R 31 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl; with the provisos that when R 1 hydrogen, and R 4 and R 5 are independently selected front hydrogen, Ci- 19 alkyl, Cl-19 aryl, or Ci- ⁇ arylalkyl, then R 10 is not hydrogen or Ci -6 alkyl; and none of R 1 , R 4 , R 5 , R 10 , R 1 1 , R i5 , R 16 , R 17 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , and R 31 comprise a bile acid moiety.
- the prodrug is a compound of Formulae (Ib) or (
- Q is O or -NR 15 ; r is an integer from 1 to 6;
- R is selected from hydrogen and a moiety comprising Formula (IX) (see above);
- R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, - C(O)OR 27 , -C(O)R 27 , -(CR I 6 R I 7 )OC(O)R" , and moieties of Formulae (XVII) and (XVIII) (see above); wherein o is 1-3, and the cycloheteroalkyl rings in (XVII) and (XVIII) are optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from halo, CN, NO 2 , OH, Ci -6 alkyl, and Ci -6 al
- R 10 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 1 1 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl, or optionally, R 1 ' and either R 16 or R 17 , together with the atoms to which R 1 ', R 16 and R 17 are attached, form a cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring, to which an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroal
- R 15 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, and substituted arylalkyl;
- R 16 and R 17 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally, R 16 and R 17 together with the carbon atoms to which R 16 and R 17 are attached form a cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring; each R 20 and R 21 is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, substituted acyl, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alklysulf ⁇ nyl, substituted alkylsulfnyl, alkylsulf
- R 27 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- R 28 and R 29 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and substituted heteroalkyl; and R 31 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl; with the proviso that none of R 1 , R 4 , R 5 , R 10 , R 11 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 20 , R 21 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29
- US20030152628 discloses a tablet which comprises an inner core formulated for controlled release consisting essentially of a mixture of levodopa ethyl ester or a derivative or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a carrier and an inner core excipient component; and an outer layer encapsulating the inner core and formulated for immediate release comprising a mixture of a decarboxylase inhibitor and levodopa ethyl ester or a derivative or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- US20030147957 discloses a tablet which comprises: an inner core formulated for controlled release comprising a mixture of (a) a granulated admixture of a decarboxylase inhibitor and a surfactant, and (b) levodopa ethyl ester or a derivative or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and an outer layer encapsulating the inner core and formulated for immediate release comprising a mixture of a granulated decarboxylase inhibitor and levodopa ethyl ester or a derivative or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. It also provides methods of manufacturing such tablets.
- US20040234608 discloses a pharmaceutical composition for use in a dosage form for oral administration to a patient.
- the composition expands upon contact with gastric fluid and promotes retention of the dosage form in the patient's stomach for a prolonged period of time.
- the application further provides pharmaceutical dosage forms containing an active ingredient, and the pharmaceutical composition.
- the forms are adapted for immediate or controlled release of the active ingredient.
- the dosage forms may be used advantageously in the treatment of Parkinson's disease with levodopa and hyperactivity and attention deficit disorder with methylphenidate.
- the composition comprises a hydrogel, a superdisintegrant and tannic acid wherein the volume of the composition increases about three fold within about 15 minutes of contacting gastric fluid.
- the hydrogel may comprise hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, and may further comprise hydroxypropyl cellulose, preferably in a weight ratio of from about 1 :3 to about 5:3.
- the hydrogel may further comprise a cross-linked polyacrylate, such as a polyacrylic acid polymer crosslinked with allyl sucrose.
- the superdisintegrant may be selected from cross- linked carboxymethylcellulose sodium, sodium starch glycolate and cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone, preferably cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose sodium or sodium starch glycolate.
- the tannic acid may be present in an amount of from about 2 weight percent to about 12 weight percent of the total weight of hydrogel, superdisintegrant and tannic acid, exclusive of other excipients that may be present.
- US20040180086 discloses gastro-retentive dosage forms for prolonged delivery of levodopa and carbidopa / levodopa combinations.
- the dosage forms comprise a tablet containing the active ingredient and a gas-generating agent sealed within an expandable, hydrophilic, water-permeable and substantially gas-impermeable membrane.
- the membrane Upon contact with gastric fluid, the membrane expands as a result of the release of gas from the gas- generating agent in the tablet.
- the expanded membrane is retained in the stomach for a prolonged period of time up to 24 hours or more during which period the active ingredient is released from the tablet providing delivery of levodopa to the site of optimum absorption in the upper small intestine.
- the application discloses a gastro- retentive dosage form of levodopa for oral administration to a patient in need thereof, the dosage form comprising (a) a tablet comprising a therapeutically effective amount of levodopa, a binder, and a pharmaceutically-acceptable gas-generating agent capable of releasing carbon dioxide upon contact with gastric juice, and (b) an expandable, hydrophilic, water-permeable and substantially gas-impermeable, membrane surrounding the tablet, wherein the membrane expands as a result of the release of carbon dioxide from the gas- generating agent upon contact with the gastric juice, whereby the dosage form becomes too large to pass into the patient's pyloric sphincter.
- the dosage form may further comprise a covering (e.g., a dry-fill capsule) for containing the dosage form, wherein the covering disintegrates upon contact with gastric fluid.
- a covering e.g., a dry-fill capsule
- the membrane may comprise polyvinyl alcohol.
- the gas-generating agent may be sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium glycine carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate or mixtures thereof.
- the binder may be a polyoxyethylene stearate, a poloxamer, a polyethylene glycol, a glycerol palmitostearate, a glyceryl monostearate, a methylcellulose or a polyvinyl pyrrolidone, such as Myrj 52, Lutrol F68, PEG 3350, a methylcellulose or a polyvinyl pyrrolidone.
- Such tablets and drug eluting devices typically contain at least 1 mg of a drug / pharmaceutical composition.
- Such tablets and drug eluting devices can also contain at least 2 mg, at least 5 mg, at least 10 mg, at least 25 mg, at least 50 mg, at least 100 mg, at least 500 mg or at least 1000 mg of a drug / pharmaceutical composition.
- drugs / pharmaceutical compositions suitable for use herein can be small organic molecules ⁇ e.g., non-polymeric molecules having a molecular weight of 2000 amu or less, such as 1000 amu or less), peptides or polypeptides and nucleic acids.
- More than one type of drug can be present in a tablet or a drug eluting device of the invention.
- the drugs can be evenly distributed throughout a medicament or can be heterogeneously distributed in a medicament, such that one drug is fully or partially released before a second drug. See different embodiments of the drug devices and/or layering in other parts of this specification.
- Dosage forms of the invention typically weigh at least 5 mg. Dosage forms (such as the various shell designs of the invention) can also weigh at least 10 mg, at least 15 mg, at least 25 mg, at least 50 mg, at least 100 mg, at least 500 mg or at least 1000 mg.
- Dosage forms of the invention typically measure at least 2 mm in one direction.
- dosage forms can measure at least 5 mm, at least 10 mm, at least 15 mm or at least 20 mm in one direction.
- the diameter of the dosage forms is 2 to 40 mm, preferably 10 to 30 mm such as 20 to 26 mm.
- Mini-tablets have a diameter of 2 mm to about 5 mm.
- Such dosage forms can measure at least 2 mm, at least 5 mm, at least 10 mm, at least 15 mm or least 20 mm in a second direction and, optionally, a third direction.
- the dosage form is of a size that facilitates swallowing by a subject.
- the volume of a typical dosage form of the invention is at least 0.008 mL, at least 0.01 mL, at least 0.05 mL, at least 0.1 mL, at least 0.125 mL, at least 0.2 mL, at least 0.3 mL, at least 0.4 mL or at least 0.5 mL.
- the drugs may be formulated as bilayer (or other multilayer) tablets or shells (e.g., stacked layer of cakes, each may represent an independent formulation).
- levodopa and carbidopa may be formulated as a tablet within a tablet or bead (not limited to two nested layers).
- the outer tablet may contain a levodopa / carbidopa combination designed to be released together either as immediate release delivery patterns or as a sustained release delivery.
- the inner tablet / bead may be formulated to release after the outer tablet / bead has released the formulations.
- the inner tablet(s) / bead(s) may be formulated with a coating layer to help achieve the desired delay in time.
- the drugs may be formulated into a core tablet held in a recessed fashion within an annular ring of drug material.
- a dosage form is described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/419,536 entitled “Dosage Form with a Core Tablet of Active Ingredient Sheathed in a Compressed Angular Body of Powder or Granular Material, and Process and Tooling for Producing It," filed on Apr. 21, 2003 and Ser. No. 10/379,338 entitled “Controlled Release Dosage Forms,” filed on Mar. 3, 2003 and are incorporated herein by reference.
- the outer annular ring is formulated with the levodopa and decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor and formulated for either immediate release or sustained release delivery for the desired time.
- the inner core(s) of the dosage form contain the dopamine transport inhibitor to be released after a delay which may be formulated for the desired release profile.
- Another embodiment of this invention may be achieved by formulating each of the drugs as pellets / beads, each with its own release profile and delay where applicable, and delivering the mixture of the three pellets in a shell using methods commonly known in the art.
- the proportions of the different types of pellets / beads may be altered or customized by a skilled artisan (e.g., qualified physician or pharmacologist), based on an individual patient's conditions, such as weight, age, gender, ethnicity, and/or specific genetic backgrounds. Such customization may be effected with the aid of, or automatically executed by a computer program based on relevant parameters such as those described above.
- Embodiments of the invention wherein each drug may be released at a different rate can be formulated as tri-layer (or multilayer if necessary) tablets.
- Each layer of the tablet may have a distinct release profile.
- a tablet within a tablet with an immediate release coating wherein the innermost tablet would be formulated with the dopamine transport inhibitor, the outer portion of the tablet formulated with levodopa, and the outer coating formulated with decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor, in an appropriate ratio according to the teachings of the instant invention.
- the drugs may be formulated into tablets held in a recessed fashion within an annular ring of drug material, as described above.
- the recessed core may be formulated as a delayed release of dopamine transport inhibitor at the desired release profile; the annular ring may be formulated to give the desired release profile of levodopa (immediate release and sustained release delivery); and an outermost coating layer may give an immediate release of decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor.
- Another embodiment uses the delivery system as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/191,298, wherein the dopamine transport inhibitor is formulated in the mantle and the expanding plug is a bilayer tablet.
- One layer of the bilayer tablet comprising levodopa formulated for sustained release delivery and the other layer comprising decarboxylase enzyme inhibitor formulated to release at the desired rate.
- Yet another embodiment of the invention could be achieved by formulating each of the drugs as pellets each with its own release profile and delay where applicable and delivering the mixture of the three pellets in a shell as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the tablet is a longitudinally compressed tablet containing a plurality of precompressed inserts of the various compositions of the invention, mixtures thereof, excipients, and optionally a permeation enhancer.
- the precompressed inserts may each have different compositions (e.g., the top insert may constitute the first IR portion, the next one or more inserts may constitute the substantially zero-order release rate second portion, etc. Drug is only released at the edge or surface of this tablet, which can result in zero-order kinetics in, for example, the second portion.
- the tablet may be encased in a sheath or shell, which has an insoluble, impermeable plug at one end to seal off the end, and has an opening (e.g., orifice) at the opposite end to allow drug release from successive layers of inserts (see Figure 1).
- the thickness of each insert may be adjusted to accommodate different dosages.
- the overall shape of the device is not necessarily cylindrical, cubic column, etc., but can be any desired shape or size.
- the tablet is a trilayer tablet having an inner core that includes one or more drugs in an appropriate matrix of excipients (e.g., HPMC, MCC, lactose) and is surrounded on two sides by a bioadhesive polymeric coating.
- a bioadhesive polymeric coatings are a DOPA-BMA polymer and a mixture of poly(fumaric-co-sebacic) anhydride and EUDRAGITTM RS PO. Other bioadhesive polymers are described in the section below.
- the tablet is comprised of a multiplicity of bioadhesive-coated microspheres or beads that have been compressed into a tablet core and subsequently coated with a bioadhesive coating and one or more additional coatings (e.g., enteric coatings).
- additional coatings e.g., enteric coatings.
- different types of beads each type with separate types and/or thickness of coatings, may be mixed together in desired or customized proportions to deliver varying amounts of first IR, second portion of zero-order release, and optionally second portion of IR, etc.
- the coatings on different types of beads may control the release timing of each type of beads.
- the drug-eluting device includes an inner reservoir comprising the effective agent; a first coating layer, which is essentially impermeable to the passage of the effective agent; and a second coating layer, which is permeable to the passage of the effective agent.
- the first coating layer covers at least a portion of the inner reservoir; however, at least a small portion of the inner reservoir is not coated with the first coating layer (e.g., there are one or more pores in the first coating layer).
- the second coating layer essentially completely covers the first coating layer and the uncoated portion of the inner reservoir.
- the first coating layer is a non-bioerodable or a slowly bioerodable polymer (e.g., a polymer having a polymethylene backbone).
- first coating is the bioadhesive coating
- second coating is the first IR portion
- the inner reservoir contains the second zero-order release portion, which may comprise one or a few layers to effect, for example, changing ratios of levodopa / carbidopa.
- One of these layers may also be the 3 rd IR portion or the dopamine transporter inhibitor (see Figure 4).
- the drug eluting device includes a multilayer core, often bilayer or more layers, formed of polymer matrices that swell upon contact with the fluids of the stomach or other GI fluids. At least one layer of the multilayer core includes a drug. A portion of the polymer matrices are surrounded by a band of insoluble material that prevents the covered portion of the polymer matrices from swelling and provides a segment of the dosage form that is of sufficient rigidity to withstand the contractions of the stomach. The core and the band of soluble material are coated with a bioadhesive polymeric coating.
- Figure 5 provides an illustrative embodiment of this configuration.
- the three depicted layers represent the immediate-release composition layer (IR), and two substantially zero-order release rate composition layers (CRl and CR2). There may be more than two such substantially zero-order release rate composition layers, differing by their specific compositions (for example, the ratio of carbidopa / levodopa in the Parkinson disease therapeutic composition).
- a bioadhesive layer or patch (hatched lines) is shown to be on the outside wall of the shell encompassing the therapeutic compositions, which are successively released through an orifice close to the IR composition (proximal end).
- the drug eluting device is an osmotic delivery system.
- the reservoir of such devices contains osmotic agents to draw water across a semi-permeable membrane and a swelling polymer to push drug out of the device at a controlled rate.
- the distal end of the shell may comprise a plug that can push the therapeutic compositions towards the orifice at the proximal end.
- the push mechanism can be any suitable means, such as a water-absorbing gel that swells when in contact with aqueous solution, or a rigid plate / plunger that can be driven by a micromotor (optionally externally activated).
- each reservior coated by a bioadhesive layer as described above may be two or more reservoirs within a shell, each reservior coated by a bioadhesive layer as described above, and each reservior contains a different composition, such as different second doses designed to be released at successive times, or second zero-order release portion and the second IR portion ( Figure 6).
- the composition may be formed as a cylinder or a column, or have a trapezoid profile (right panel).
- the compositions e.g., levodopa 72 and carbidopa 71
- the top (beginning) of the dosage form has a different carbidopa / levodopa ratio from the bottom (end) of the dosage form.
- the first IR portion is formed as a layer, while one or more second portions (sustained zero-order release portion, e.g., CR2) may be formulated as coated beads embedded in a layer of another sustained zero-order release sub-portion (e.g., CRl).
- sustained zero-order release portion e.g., CR2
- CRl sustained zero-order release sub-portion
- the other sub-portions e.g., CR2
- the first IR portion 91 covers the bioadhesive layer 94, which in turn covers the inner compositions, such as various sustained release (zero-order release) sub-portions (e.g. , CRl 93), and/or an optional ascending release portion (92), which may also be occupied by another sub-portion of sustained release (zero-order release).
- the first sub-portion of the zero-order release (CRl 93) may have a geometric shape (regular or irregular, symmetrical or asymmetrical) such that increasing or decreasing amounts of drugs may be released in unit time periods.
- the dosage form takes the shape of a rod, with the first IR portion 1101 situated at one or both ends (or on the surface (not shown)) of the rod. If there is one or more controlled release (zero-order release) sub-portion (such as CR2 1103), they are each sealed off by a substantially impermeable bioadhesive band 1104, such that their release is delayed, until the other controlled release sub-portions (such as CRl 1102) are substantially completely released (see Figure 11).
- controlled release sub-portion such as CR2 1103
- each of the substantially impermeable bioadhesive bands 1104 is an inert backing layer, which may or may not contain bioadhesive materials.
- the two 1104 layers separate the controlled release layer 1102 to a portion that is between the backing layers 1104 (the inside portion), and two portions that is outside the backing layers 1104 (the outside portions).
- the inside portion of 1102 is only exposed to solvents around the edge due to the presence of the two backing layers 1104.
- one or both of the outside portions of 1102 may be absent, and/or one of the two immediate release portions 1101 is absent.
- One exemplary variant configuration is also shown in Figure 57.
- Figure 12 shows yet another embodiment depicting a multilaminate bioadhesive buccal patch or tablet.
- the dosage form attaches to the mucosa surface (preferably through a bioadhesive layer attached to the CR2 layer, optionally also the CRl layer, as described above), and sequentially releases the first IR 1202, and one or more sub-portions (e.g., CRl 1203 and CR2 1204) of controlled release sub-portions of the zero-order release portion (second portion).
- Figure 13 features a dose sipping system, where various types of beads corresponding to various sub-portions of controlled release (only two sub-portions, CRl and CR2, are shown as 1302) are embedded in a matrix of the first IR portion 1301, which in turn is deposited in a straw / tube. One end of the straw is sealed off by a porous plug 1303 to allow aqueous bodily fluid to seep in upon applying suction from the other end of the straw.
- This embodiment also relates to a general concept for drug delivery, wherein a first portion of a multi-portion dosage form is formulated as a matrix for embedding one or more other portions of the same dosage form.
- the first portion is an immediate release (IR) formulation
- the other embedded portions are controlled release (CR) portions
- each CR portion is optionally coated by a bioadhesive coat and/or a delayed release coat.
- Each CR portion may be formed as microparticles (e.g., beads) suspended in the first portion (e.g., IR portion) matrix. The disintegration of the matrix leads to the release of the embedded microparticles, which may re-adhere to the gut or other tissues (if coated by bioadhesive layer), and provided for sustained release.
- This embodiment also relates to a general system for drug delivery, wherein therapeutic compositions are deposited at the end of a hollow tube sealed off by a porous plug.
- the plug holds the therapeutic compositions inside the tube, but is also porous enough to allow liquid to come into the tube through the plug if a vaccum is generated inside the tube (such as by sipping or applying suction).
- the dissolved therapeutic compositions can then exit through the opposite end of the tube, e.g., into the patient's mouth.
- Figure 14 features a delivery device with a shell comprising a cap and a bioadhesive body.
- the cap is made of gelatin-type of material that is readily dissolved once the shell is internalized by a patient.
- the body of the shell comprises a bioadhesive material of the subject invention.
- the IR portion, and the substantially zero-order release portion may be sequentially released as shown.
- the one or more CR sub-portions may be embedded within the IR matrix as described in other embodiments of the invention.
- Figure 18 features yet another configuration of the delivery device, in which a CR portion 1801 is sandwiched between two adhesive layers 1802 (e.g., a layered cross section) or inside one continuous adhesive layer 1802 (e.g., configured as a filled tube).
- SPHEROMERTM I [p(FASA)] and SPHEROMERTM III are exemplary such bioadhesive layers (see, e.g., Example 5 in WO 2007/002516).
- the portion / layer can (but need not) be substantially flat.
- Components of the CR can be either released from surfaces not in contact with the adhesive parts 1802, and/or through the adhesive materials if such materials are at least partially permeable.
- An immediate release portion IR 1803 is coated over all or a part of the adhesive layer 1802.
- the rapid dissolution of the IR portion exposes a CR surface not in contact with the adhesive material.
- the dissolution of the IR portion does not substantially change the release rate of the CR portion.
- the tablet may be produced using methods such as those described in Examples 6-12 of WO 2007/002516.
- Figure 19 features yet another configuration of the subject delivery device, which may be used in general to deliver any kind of drugs (or prodrugs, metablic precursors thereof, etc.).
- levodopa and/or carbidopa were used in the Examples to illustrate the delivery method, device and dosage form, it should be understood that the subject delivery devices (such as the one described in Figure 19), dosage form, and methods of making and using are not limited to these specific exemplary drug compositions described herein.
- any drug to be delivered e.g., levodopa and/or carbidopa
- a bioadhesive polymer composition e.g., polymethyl methacrylate
- pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be formulated using the subject granulation- extrusion-spheronization process into multiparticulate pellets, which in turn may be dispersed in certain matrix materials, or simply encapsulated in capsules.
- Suitable excipients for use in the subject granulation-extrusion- spheronization process include: Starcap-1500, starch- 1500, and glycerine monostearate.
- the mixture is substantially free of microcrystalline cellulose.
- about 30-90%, about 40-85%, or about 50-80% (v/v) of the mixture (and the pellets formed therefrom) is effective ingredient (e.g., drug composition), rather than excipients or polymers.
- effective ingredient e.g., drug composition
- Such loadings can be achieved using any drug or combination of drugs that are suitably cohesive, plastic, and engage in hydrogen bonding. Levodopa and carbidopa are examples of such drugs, though others will be known to or can be easily identified by those of skill in the art.
- a planetary type mixer e.g., Hobart Mixer with a 5-qt mixing bowl, operating at the speed setting #1, for about 5-15 min.
- the blending process is done in small volume to reduce any possible loss of the ingredients due to their non-specific adherence to the blending device.
- the blending step is typically done to ensure the formation of a uniform dry mix of the ingredients, typically over a period of, e.g., 5-15 min.
- Granulation fluids may be purified water, an aqueous solution of a mineral or organic acid, an aqueous solution of a polymeric composition, a pharmaceutically acceptable alcohol, a ketone or a chlorinated solvent, a hydro-alcoholic mixture, an alcoholic or hydro-alcoholic solution of a polymeric composition, a solution of a polymeric composition in a chlorinated solvent or in a ketone, etc.
- the granulation process is conducted in a small volume, such as in a 500-mL cylindrical vessel.
- the granulation process is conducted with manual mixing, or conducted mechanically, e.g., in a planetary type mixer (such as a Hobart Mixer with a 5-qt mixing bowl). If the Hobart Mixer is used, it can be operated at its speed setting #1, depending on the batch size. Other types of mechanical mixers may also be used, with their respective appropriate settings, to achieve substantially the same result.
- a planetary type mixer such as a Hobart Mixer with a 5-qt mixing bowl.
- Other types of mechanical mixers may also be used, with their respective appropriate settings, to achieve substantially the same result.
- the wet granulation may be extruded through the screen of a screen- type extruder.
- a Caleva Model 20 (or Model 25) Extruder may be used, operating at 10-20 rpm, and forming breakable wet strands ("the extrudate").
- the screen aperture may be set at 0.8, 1 , or 1.5 mm. Other types of extruders may be used to achieve
- the extrudate may then be spheronized in a spheronizer.
- a spheronizer For example, a Caleva Model 250 spheronizer equipped with a 2.5-mm spheronization plate may be used, which may be operated at a speed of about 1000-2000 rpm, typically for 5-10 min., in order to form spheronized pellets.
- Other types of spheronizer may be used to achieve substantially the same result.
- the extruding step and the spheronization step may be omitted.
- the spheronized pellets may then be dried.
- the drying may be conducted in a fluidized bed drier, such as a Vector MFL.01 Micro Batch Fluid Bed System.
- a fluidized bed drier such as a Vector MFL.01 Micro Batch Fluid Bed System.
- the Vector drier may be operated at an inlet air flow rate of 100-300 lpm (liters per minute) and an inlet air temperature of about 50 0 C.
- the pellets may be dried in an ACT (Applied Chemical Technology) fluidized bed drier, operating at an inlet air flow rate of 140- 150 fpm (foot per minute) and an inlet air temperature of 104 0 F.
- ACT Applied Chemical Technology
- Other types of driers may also be used to achieve substantially the same result.
- the drying temperature for a drier similar to the Vector drier may be between 35-70 0 C, or 40-65 0 C, or 45-60 0 C, or 45-55 0 C, etc.
- the drying temperature for a drier similar to the ACT drier may be between 70-140 0 F, or 80-130 0 F, or 90-120 0 F, or 100-110 0 F, etc.
- the spheronized pellets may be dried in an oven, such as a Precision gravity oven, operating at about 50 0 C, for 4-48 hrs, or 8-24 hrs.
- the oven drying temperature for a drier similar to the Precision gravity oven may be between 35-70 0 C, or 40-65 0 C, or 45-60 0 C, or 45-55 0 C, etc.
- the dried pellets may then be screened and/or classified. This can be done by using a stack of sieves, such as stainless steel sieves U.S. standard mesh sizes 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 40, 45, or 60, etc., and using a mechanical sieve shaker ⁇ e.g., W. S. Tyler Sieve Shaker Ro-Tap Rx-29, operated for 5 min.). Particle size and distribution of pellet formulations can then be analyzed, and the classified pellets ranging from 0.25 mm (mesh # 60) to 2 mm (mesh # 10) may be selected for use or future formulation, such as additional film coating or other experimentation.
- a stack of sieves such as stainless steel sieves U.S. standard mesh sizes 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 40, 45, or 60, etc.
- a mechanical sieve shaker ⁇ e.g., W. S. Tyler Sieve Shaker Ro-Tap Rx-29, operated for 5 min.
- the formed pellets may be film-coated, e.g., with a delayed- release coating (such as an entaric coating), a controlled-release (CR) coating, a bioadhesive polymeric composition, and/or a dispersion-promoting coating, etc.
- a delayed- release coating such as an entaric coating
- CR controlled-release
- the pellet core may be optionally surrounded by a CR coating, such as polymeric substance based on acrylates and/or methacrylates, e.g. , a EUDRAGITTM polymer (sold by Rohm America, Inc.).
- a EUDRAGITTM polymer sold by Rohm America, Inc.
- Specific EUDRAGITTM polymers can be selected having various permeability and water solubility, which properties can be pH dependent or pH independent.
- EUDRAGITTM RL, EUDRAGITTM NE, and EUDRAGITTM RS are acrylic resins comprising copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, which are present as salts and give rise to the permeability of the lacquer films.
- EUDRAGITTM RL is freely permeable and EUDRAGITTM RS is slightly permeable, independent of pH. In contrast, the permeability of EUDRAGITTM L is pH dependent. EUDRAGITTM L is an anionic polymer synthesized from methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid methyl ester. It is insoluble in acids and pure water, but becomes increasingly soluble in a neutral to weakly alkaline solution by forming salts with alkalis. Above pH 5.0, the polymer becomes increasingly permeable. If desired, two or more types of polymeric substances may be mixed for use as the CR coating. Other polymers suitable for CR coatings, such as ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate, can also be used in the CR coating. In certain embodiments, the CR coating may comprise one or more suitable polymers, such as a combination of two or more of the polymers discussed above.
- the pellets may also be coated by a bioadhesive polymeric composition.
- the adhesive material may facilitate the adhesion of the pellets to a desired surface, such as a preferred GI tract surface.
- the pellets / beads may be coated by a top-layer of a bioadhesive polymer such as SPHEROMERTM I [p(FASA)], SPHEROMERTM II, SPHEROMERTM III, SPHEROMERTM IV, or mixtures thereof (see, e.g., Example 14 of WO 2007/002516).
- the SPHEROMERTM III or IV bioadhesive polymers, citric acid, and hydroxypropyl cellulose components are common to both the tablet formulation and the multiparticulate extended release capsule formulations. Additional excipients used in the multilayer extended release tablet formulations include magnesium stearate, succinic acid, hypromellose, corn starch, Ludipress ® , butylated hydroxytoluene and p[FA:SA] or (SPHEROMERTM I). Poly[fumaric-co-sebacic acid anhydride] or p[FA:SA] (SPHEROMERTM I), is a bioadhesive polymer developed by Applicants that is similar to SPHEROMERTM III.
- SPHEROMERTM I polymer is a polyanhydride copolymer of fumaric anhydride and sebacic anhydride reacted through polycondensation.
- Applicants have demonstrated the synergystic effect of SPHEROMERTM I, in in-vitro and animal studies, when combining the polymer with SPHEROMERTM III and using them as bioadhesives in improving the GI residence time and bioavailability of drugs in solid oral dosage forms.
- the chemical structures of fumaric anhydride and sebacic anhydride and their reaction to form SPHEROMERTM I are depicted below:
- the SPHEROMERTM III polymer was developed by Applicants. Applicants have demonstrated the utility and safety of polyanhydride polymers as bioadhesives for improving the GI residence time and bioavailability of drugs in solid oral dosage forms in both animal and human studies. Recent research has focused on the usefulness of bioadhesives fashioned after the adhesives secreted by marine mussels ⁇ Mytilus edulis). Levodopa, a naturally- occurring, phenolic, amino acid widely for treatment of Parkinson's disease, has been identified as a key bioadhesive component of mussel adhesive. Synthetic polymers that are hydrophobic hydrogen bond with GI mucus, and have solubility parameters similar to mucus glycoproteins that exhibit bioadhesion. Examples of such polymers include degradable and non-degradable polyanhydrides.
- a polymer combining hydrophobic polyanhydrides and bioadhesive, phenolic amino acids such as levodopa should demonstrate superior bioadhesive properties.
- L-DOPA-BMA poly(butadiene-maleic anhydride)
- SPHEROMERTM III polyamide copolymer
- Levodopa was covalently grafted to the BMA backbone and in vitro degradation studies have shown that less than 2% of the bound levodopa was released during 3 days of incubation in various biological fluids (liver and brain homogenates) and buffers. Toxicokinetic studies in beagle dogs have demonstrated that exogenous levodopa derived from degradation of SPHEROMERTM III polymer in bioadhesive tablets is not detectable in plasma.
- the SPHEROMERTM IV polymer is a butadiene maleic anhydride copolymer grafted with carbidopa, and its monomer is represented by the following structure (without the terminal -CH 3 groups in polymer repeats):
- PCT/US2006/024352 (filed on June 23, 2006, titled "Bioadhesive Polymers") provides more detailed description of the SPHEROMERTM I, II, III, and IV polymers. The entire contents of the PCT application PCT/US2006/024352 is incorporated herein by reference.
- a CR coating and bioadhesive coating can be combined in a single layer by using a mixture of polymers including a bioadhesive polymeric material and a polymer suitable for controlled release, i.e., a single layer may be both the CR layer and the bioadhesive layer of a particle.
- the pellets can also be film-coated with an additional layer of a so-called "non-functional polymer,” such as OPADRYTM II, EUDRAGITTM E, ACRYL-EZETM, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylacetate, polyanhydride, etc. (see, e.g., Example 14 of WO 2007/002516).
- This layer may serve as a dispersion-promoting coating that inhibits clumping and aggregation of the particles during dispersion.
- this layer is preferably sufficiently strong or resilient to remain substantially intact during the compression process.
- This layer may also be protected by including a cushioning material among the excipients of the tablet matrix such as spray dried lactose, various grades of microcrystalline cellulose, glyceryl monostearate, pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, PEG 8000, dicalcium phosphate (Di-Tab), calciumhydrogenphosphate (Bekapress D2) and cellactose.
- a cushioning material among the excipients of the tablet matrix such as spray dried lactose, various grades of microcrystalline cellulose, glyceryl monostearate, pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, PEG 8000, dicalcium phosphate (Di-Tab), calciumhydrogenphosphate (Bekapress D2) and cellactose.
- the coating material (such as bioadhesive polymeric materials and/or functional / nonfunctonal polymers) may be dissolved in an appropriate solvent, such as methylene chloride (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM I), methanol (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM III), a binary mixture of methanol and methylene chloride (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM I and SPHEROMERTM III), methanol or a binary mixture of ethanol and water (3: 1 v/v) (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM IV), or methanol, ethanol, or isopropanol, or their binary mixture with acetone (e.g., functional or non-functional polymer).
- an appropriate solvent such as methylene chloride (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM I), methanol (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM III), a binary mixture of methanol and methylene chloride (e.g., for SPHEROMERTM I and
- the film coating may be performed in a fluidized bed coater, such as a Vector MFL.01 Micro Batch Fluid Bed System, equipped with a Wurster insert, operating at an inlet air flow rate of 100-300 lpm (liters per minute), and an inlet air temperature of about 25-45 0 C, or about 30-40 0 C, depending on the specific drugs and coatings (e.g., 25-30 0 C for SPHEROMERTM I-coated levodopa-carbidopa; about 35 0 C for SPHEROMERTM Ill-coated levodopa-carbidopa, etc.).
- the pellets may be pre-warmed at 35 0 C for 2-5 min., and after film-coating, post-dried at about 30 0 C for about 15-30 min.
- pellets may be coated in a fluid bed processor, such as a Fluid Air Model 5 fluid bed processor equipped with a Wurster insert, operating at an inlet air flow rate of about 70 cfrn (cubic foot per minute) and an inlet air temperature of about 35 0 C.
- a fluid bed processor such as a Fluid Air Model 5 fluid bed processor equipped with a Wurster insert, operating at an inlet air flow rate of about 70 cfrn (cubic foot per minute) and an inlet air temperature of about 35 0 C.
- the pellets may be pre-warmed at 40 0 C for 5-7 min., and after film-coating, post-dried at about 35 0 C for about 30 min.
- Different lots or even different types of the same pellets produced using the subject method may optionally be mixed, e.g., by using a blender (such as- a GlobePharma Maxiblend Blender equipped with an 8-qt stainless steel V-shell).
- a blender such as- a GlobePharma Maxiblend Blender equipped with an 8-qt stainless steel V-shell.
- pellets may be mixed. For example, some pellets may have no coating and are simply a core comprising the effective ingredients. Other pellets, even if identically in core structure, may further be coated by one or more types of coatings, e.g., bioadhesive coating, delayed-release coating, controlled-release coating, and/or dispersion-promoting coating, etc.
- coatings e.g., bioadhesive coating, delayed-release coating, controlled-release coating, and/or dispersion-promoting coating, etc.
- pellets produced using the methods of the invention may be encapsulated in capsules, such as hard gelatin capsules or pullulan capsules (NPcapsTM), each with a predetermined amount of effective ingredients.
- capsules such as hard gelatin capsules or pullulan capsules (NPcapsTM)
- the effective ingredients are carbidopa and levodopa, 50 mg carbidopa and 200 mg of the levodopa may be encapsulated.
- pellets produced using the methods of the invention may be dispersed in a matrix material to assist the delivery of the effective ingredients of the pellets.
- a matrix material to assist the delivery of the effective ingredients of the pellets.
- Figure 19 shows a schematic drawing (not to scale) of one such configuration.
- the active components 1901 such as the pellets produced using the subject method, which are not necessarily round in shape
- the carrier matrix 1902 can rapidly disintegrate, e.g., dissolve substantially completely (superdisintegrant) within about 15 minutes, 10 minutes, 8 minutes, 7 minutes, 6 minutes, 5 minutes, 3 minutes, 2 minutes, or about 1 minute or less. See, e.g., Example 15 of WO 2007/002516.
- the inactive material 1902 may additionally comprise one or more cushioning materials dispersed throughout, e.g., sufficient to protect the active components 1901 when preparing the delivery device, by substantially absorbing the impact of compacting, and/or reducing friction on the surface of the particles 1901 (to prevent damaging the substructure of the particles, see below).
- a filler/binder in order to incorporate these particles into a tablet matrix, a filler/binder must be used in the tableting process that will not allow the destruction of the pellets during the tableting process.
- Materials that are suitable for this purpose include, but are not limited to, microcrystalline cellulose (AVICEL ® ), soy polysaccharide (EMCOSOY ® ), pre-gelatinized starches (STARCH ® 1500, NATIONAL ® 1551), and polyethylene glycols (CARBOW AX ® ). These materials may be present in the range of about 5%-75% (w/w), and preferably between about 25%-50% (w/w).
- disintegrants are added to the tablets in order to disperse the beads once the tablet is ingested.
- Suitable disintegrants include, but are not limited to: crosslinked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (AC-DI-SOL ® ), sodium starch glycolate (EXPLOT AB ® , PRIMOJEL ® ), and crosslinked polyvinylpolypyrrolidone (Plasone-XL). These materials may be present in the range of about 3%-15% (w/w), with a preferred range of about 5%-10% (w/w).
- Lubricants are also added to assure proper tableting, and these can include, but are not limited to: magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, polyethylene glycol, leucine, glyceryl behenate, and hydrogenated vegetable oil. These lubricants should be present in amounts from about 0.1%-10% (w/w), with a preferred range of about 0.3%-3.0% (w/w).
- the particles 1901 may be in any suitable size and shape (rods, beads, or other regular or irregular shapes).
- the particles are beads with a diameter of less than about 2 mm, about 1.5 mm, about 1 mm, about 0.8 mm, about 0.7 mm, about 0.5 mm, about 0.3 mm, or about 0.1 mm.
- the pellets are substantially homogeneous in size and/or shape.
- the pellet size is about 0.8 - 1 mm. Particles are formulated to these sizes in order to enable high drug loading when needed.
- particles 1901 may have substructures, such as various coating layers surrounding a drug / prodrug core.
- substructures such as various coating layers surrounding a drug / prodrug core.
- the core by itself may be an immediate release portion, or may have release- controlling components (e.g., CR portion), and preferably, the core is made by extrusion, such as the granulation-extrusion-spheronization process described in, e.g., Example 13 of WO 2007/002516.
- the core is optionally surrounded by a CR coating, such as polymeric substance based on acrylates and/or methacrylates, e.g., a EUDRAGITTM polymer (sold by Rohm America, Inc.).
- a EUDRAGITTM polymers can be selected having various permeability and water solubility, which properties can be pH dependent or pH independent.
- EUDRAGITTM RL, EUDRAGITTM NE, and EUDRAGITTM RS are acrylic resins comprising copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, which are present as salts and give rise to the permeability of the lacquer films.
- EUDRAGITTM RL is freely permeable and EUDRAGITTM RS is slightly permeable, independent of pH.
- the permeability of EUDRAGITTM L is pH dependent.
- EUDRAGITTM L is an anionic polymer synthesized from methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid methyl ester.
- CR coating It is insoluble in acids and pure water, but becomes increasingly soluble in a neutral to weakly alkaline solution by forming salts with alkalis. Above pH 5.0, the polymer becomes increasingly permeable.
- two or more types of polymeric substances may be mixed for use as the CR coating.
- Other polymers suitable for CR coatings such as ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate, can be used in the CR coating.
- the CR coating may comprise one or more suitable polymers, such as a combination of two or more of the polymers discussed above.
- the CR coating is itself coated by a layer of adhesive material that facilitates the adhesion of the particles / beads to a desired surface, such as a preferred GI tract surface.
- a desired surface such as a preferred GI tract surface.
- suitable adhesive materials are described herein above.
- the pellets / beads may be coated by a top-layer of a bioadhesive polymer such as SPHEROMERTM I [p(FASA)], SPHEROMERTM III, SPHEROMERTM IV, or mixtures thereof (see, e.g., Example 14 of WO 2007/002516).
- a CR coating and bioadhesive coating can be combined in a single layer by using a mixture of polymers including a bioadhesive polymeric material and a polymer suitable for controlled release, i.e., a single layer may be both the CR layer and the bioadhesive layer of a particle.
- pellets can be further film-coated with an additional layer of a so-called "non-functional polymer” such as OPADRYTM II, EUDRAGITTM E, ACRYL-EZETM, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylacetate, polyanhydride, etc. (see, e.g., Example 14 of WO 2007/002516).
- This layer may serve as a dispersion-promoting coating that inhibits clumping and aggregation of the particles during dispersion.
- this layer is preferably sufficiently strong or resilient to remain substantially intact during the compression process.
- This layer may also be protected by including a cushioning material among the excipients of the tablet matrix such as spray dried lactose, various grades of microcrystalline cellulose, glyceryl monostearate, pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, PEG 8000, dicalcium phosphate (Di-Tab), calciumhydrogenphosphate (Bekapress D2) and cellactose, e.g., so that the the outer layer is not significantly scratched or gouged during the compression process, and/or retains its dispersion-promoting properties.
- a cushioning material among the excipients of the tablet matrix such as spray dried lactose, various grades of microcrystalline cellulose, glyceryl monostearate, pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, PEG 8000, dicalcium phosphate (Di-Tab), calciumhydrogenphosphate (Bekapress D2) and cellactose, e.g., so that the the outer layer is not significantly scratched or gouged during the
- an IR portion is included in the particle, such as over the dispersion- promoting coating, or between the dispersion-promoting coating and the adhesive layer, etc.
- particles 1901 are not embedded within the inactive material 1902, but are instead disposed loose in a capsule that dissolves and releases the particles in the GI tract.
- any other embodiments of the invention such as those utilizing beads / pellets (see e.g., Figures 2, 8, 13, etc.), may additionally or alternatively use the coated pellets shown in Figure 19.
- Figure 20 features yet another embodiment of the delivery device, in which particles described herein above ⁇ e.g., with respect to Figure 19) are embedded within a slow eroding material 2001 ⁇ e.g., that gradually erodes over 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hr, 2 hrs, 4 hrs, 6 hrs, or longer). At least a portion of the eroding material 2001 is covered by an IR portion 2002, which disintegrates relatively rapidly to expose a surface of eroding material 2001. A portion of the slow eroding material 2001 is also optionally covered by a passive polymer support layer and/or an adhesive material 2003 as described herein above. In certain embodiments, the IR portion 2002 may be disposed on the adhesive layer 2003 instead of the eroding material 2001 as depicted. See, e.g., Example 16 of WO 2007/002516.
- any drug to be delivered ⁇ e.g., levodopa and/or carbidopa), optionally including a bioadhesive polymer composition, and/or pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, may also be formulated as a multilayer tablet.
- ingredients are weighed and mixed. These ingredients, possibly with the exception of any lubricants, can then be blended together in any suitable device, such as an end-over-end ATR rotator ⁇ e.g., model RKVS), or a planetary type mixer ⁇ e.g., Hobart Mixer).
- the blending process is done in small volume to reduce any possible loss of the ingredients due to their non-specific adherence to the blending device.
- the blending step is typically done to ensure the formation of a uniform dry mix of the ingredients, typically over a period of, e.g., 5-15 min.
- Granulation fluids may be purified water, an aqueous solution of a mineral or organic acid, an aqueous solution of a polymeric composition, a pharmaceutically acceptable alcohol, a ketone or a chlorinated solvent, a hydro-alcoholic mixture, an alcoholic or hydro-alcoholic solution of a polymeric composition, a solution of a polymeric composition in a chlorinated solvent or in a ketone, etc.
- the granulation process is conducted in a small volume, such as in a 500-mL cylindrical vessel.
- the granulation process is conducted with manual mixing, or conducted mechanically, e.g. , in a planetary type mixer (such as a Hobart Mixer with a 5-qt mixing bowl). If the Hobart Mixer is used, it can be operated at its speed setting #1 , depending on the batch size. Other types of mechanical mixers may also be used, with their respective appropriate settings, to achieve substantially the same result.
- a planetary type mixer such as a Hobart Mixer with a 5-qt mixing bowl.
- the Hobart Mixer can be operated at its speed setting #1 , depending on the batch size.
- Other types of mechanical mixers may also be used, with their respective appropriate settings, to achieve substantially the same result.
- the wet granulation is dried.
- the wet granulation is dried in an oven ⁇ e.g., a Precision gravity oven, operating at about 50 0 C, for 8- 24 hrs; or similar appropriate conditions for other types of ovens).
- the granulation may be dried in a fluidized bed drier, such as a Vector MFL.01 Micro Batch Fluid Bed System, operating at an inlet air flow rate of 100-300 lpm (liters per minute) and an inlet air temperature of about 50 0 C.
- the drying temperature is generally around 50 0 C. However, depending on different types of drugs / compositions, the temperature may be 35-70 0 C, or 40-65 0 C, or 45-60 0 C, or 45-55 0 C, etc.
- the dried granulation is then ground, e.g., by using a pestle in a mortar, optionally followed by sieving the ground material, e.g., through an approrpiate-sized screen (such as a U.S. Std. mesh # 60 screen), depending on the desired size of the granules.
- a pestle in a mortar
- sieving e.g., through an approrpiate-sized screen (such as a U.S. Std. mesh # 60 screen), depending on the desired size of the granules.
- the sieved granulation may be blended with a lubricant.
- the blending is conducted using an end-over-end ATR rotator ⁇ e.g., model RKVS).
- the blending is conducted using a planetary type mixer ⁇ e.g., Hobart Mixer, operating at the speed setting #1, for 5-15 min.). As a result, a uniformly lubricated dry mix is formed, which is then ready for compression.
- the lubricated dry mix may be passed through a sieve or screen, e.g., a U.S. Std. mesh # 60 screen.
- Different components of the pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a mixture or separately using the subject methods.
- the dry mixes can be compressed into single layer or multilayer tablets.
- the lubricated dry mix may be pressed into tablets, such as by using a single-station manual tablet press (e.g., GlobePharma Manual Tablet Compaction Machine MTCM-I, equipped with adequate die and punch set).
- a single-station manual tablet press e.g., GlobePharma Manual Tablet Compaction Machine MTCM-I, equipped with adequate die and punch set.
- tablets may be prepared, e.g., at a pressure ranging from 250 to 4000 pounds per square inch (psi), and a compression time of, e.g., 1 to 4 seconds.
- Other machines may also be used to achieve substantially the same result.
- tablets may be produced with wet granulation of active ingredients followed by direct compression (see, e.g., Example 6 of WO 2007/002516).
- multilayer tablets may be produced, with each layer comprising a different ingredient.
- a single-station manual tablet press e.g., GlobePharma Manual Tablet Compaction Machine MTCM-I, equipped with adequate die and punch set
- the compression process may include:
- pre-compressing the two layers together e.g., at a pressure ranging from 250 to 500 pounds per square inch (psi) and a compression time of, e.g., 1 to 5 seconds.
- the process can be repeated or modified if more than two layers of ingredients are to be used.
- the tablet can be made with a pre-compressed insert with effective ingredients.
- Such pre-compressed inserts may be produced with direct compression (see, e.g., Example 10 of WO 2007/002516).
- the same press machine may be used for this process.
- tablet inserts may be prepared, e.g., at a pressure ranging from 500 to 1000 pounds per square inch (psi), and a compression time of, e.g., 1 to 2 seconds.
- Other machines may also be used to achieve substantially the same result.
- the pre-compressed insert may be used as one of the layers (e.g., the second layer) in the tablet, or embedded in the middle of another layer (e.g., the second layer). See, for example, Example 10 of WO 2007/002516.
- the tablets may be coated with one or more coating compositions, such as in the form of successive layers.
- the coating compositions may include bioadhesive layers, delayed release layers, controlled-release layers, and/or other functional / non-functional polymers etc. (supra).
- tablets may be film-coated for this purpose, using a pan coater (e.g., O'Hara Labcoat, operating at an inlet air flow rate of about 60 cfm (cubic foot per minute) and an inlet air temperature of about 35 0 C).
- the tablets may be pre-warmed at 35 0 C for 5-10 min., and after film coating, may be post-dried at about 30 0 C for about 15-30 min.
- Other coaters may also be used to achieve substantially the same result.
- Figure 21 features yet another embodiment of the delivery device, in which particles 2100 described herein above (e.g., with respect to Figure 19) are dispersed on the surface of a bioadhesive film 2101.
- the film may optionally be dried or cured, e.g., without disrupting the particle adhesion.
- the film may then be placed in a capsule 2102 for administration to a patient. If needed, the film may first be folded or cut to a suitable shape or size. Once administered to a patient, the capsule releases the film, which then rehydrates (if necessary) and adheres to a mucosal surface, allowing the particles spreaded and adhered thereto to release the active components.
- the subject composition is formulated for variable dosing, such as customized dosing for individual patients.
- more than one type of drugs can be present in a tablet or a drug eluting device of the invention, e.g. , for combination therapy with other pharmaceutical compositions effective for treating PD or other movement disorders (see below).
- the drugs can be evenly distributed throughout a medicament or can be heterogeneously distributed in a medicament, such that one drug is fully or partially released before a second drug. See different embodiments of the drug devices and/or layering in other parts of this specification.
- Dosage forms of the invention typically weigh at least about 50 mg. Dosage forms (such as the various shell designs of the invention) can also weigh at least 100 mg, at least 150 mg, at least 250 mg, at least 500 mg, or at least 1000 mg, etc.
- Dosage forms (e.g, capsule or tablet) of the invention typically measure at least 2 mm in one direction.
- dosage forms can measure at least 5 mm, at least 10 mm, at least 15 mm or at least 20 mm in one direction.
- the diameter of the dosage forms is 2 to 40 mm, preferably 10 to 30 mm such as 20 to 26 mm.
- Mini-tablets have a diameter of 2 mm to about 5 mm.
- Such dosage forms can measure at least 2 mm, at least 5 mm, at least 10 mm, at least 15 mm or least 20 mm in a second direction and, optionally, a third direction.
- the dosage form is of a size that facilitates swallowing by a subject.
- the volume of a typical dosage form of the invention is at least 0.008 mL, at least 0.01 mL, at least 0.05 mL, at least 0.1 mL, at least 0.125 mL, at least 0.2 mL, at least 03 mL, at least 0.4 mL or at least 0.5 mL.
- Dosage forms of the invention may be a tablet that can be of any suitable size and shape, for example, round, oval polygonal or pillow-shaped, and optionally bears nonfunctional surface markings. Especially in the case of coated tablets, they are preferably designed to be swallowed whole and are therefore typically not provided with a breaking score. Tablets of the invention can be packaged in a container, e.g., accompanied by a package insert providing pertinent information such as, for example, dosage and administration information, contraindications, precautions, drug interactions and adverse reactions.
- the drugs may be formulated as bilayer (or other multilayer) tablets or shells (e.g., stacked layer of cakes, each may represent an independent formulation).
- the drugs may be formulated as a tablet within a tablet or bead (not limited to two nested layers).
- a bioadhesive layer may be coated over part or all of a gel capsule (or other forms of delivery device) to enhance the stay of the device within a certain area of the GI tract, such as the intestine.
- biocompatible polymers including hydrogels
- biodegradable polymers undergo chemical decomposition to form soluble monomers or soluble polymer units.
- the biodegradation of polymers usually involves chemically or enzymatically catalyzed hydrolysis.
- biodegradable polymers comprise a member selected from biodegradable poly( amides), poly(amino acids), poly(esters), poly(lactic acid), poly(glycolic acid), poly(orthoesters), poly(anhydrides), biodegradable poly(dehydropyrans), and poly(dioxinones).
- the polymers are known to the art in Controlled Release of Drugs, by Rosoff, Ch. 2, pp. 53-95 (1989); and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,811,444; 3,962,414; 4,066,747; 4,070,347; 4,079,038; and 4,093,709.
- representative dosage forms include hydrogel matrix containing a plurality of tiny pills or other particles.
- the hydrogel matrix comprises a hydrophilic polymer, such as selected from a polysaccharide, agar, agarose, natural gum, alkali alginate including sodium alginate, carrageenan, fucoidan, furcellaran, laminaran, hypnea, gum arabic, gum ghatti, gum karaya, gum tragacanth, locust bean gum, pectin, amylopectin, gelatin and a hydrophilic colloid.
- a hydrophilic polymer such as selected from a polysaccharide, agar, agarose, natural gum, alkali alginate including sodium alginate, carrageenan, fucoidan, furcellaran, laminaran, hypnea, gum arabic, gum ghatti, gum karaya, gum tragacanth, locust bean gum, pectin,
- the hydrogel matrix comprises a plurality of tiny pills or particles (such as 4 to 50), each tiny pill or particle may comprise a different portion of the subject compositions (e.g., IR, etc.).
- wall-forming materials include a triglyceryl ester selected from glyceryl tristearate, glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl dipalmitate, glyceryl laureate, glyceryl didecenoate and glyceryl tridecenoate.
- Other wall forming materials comprise polyvinyl acetate phthalate, methylcellulose phthalate, and microporous vinyl olefins. Procedures for manufacturing tiny pills are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,153; 4,721,613; 4,853,229; 2,996,431 ; 3,139,383 and 4,752,470, which are incorporated by reference herein.
- the invention employs a dosage form comprising a polymer that releases a drug by diffusion, flux through pores, or by rupture of a polymer matrix.
- the dosage form matrix can be made by procedures known to the polymer art.
- An example of providing a dosage form comprises blending a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, like polyethylene glycol, with a known dose of the subject pharmaceutical composition, and adding it to a silastic medical grade elastomer with a cross-linking agent, like stannous octanoate, followed by casting in a mold. The step is repeated for each successive layer.
- the system is allowed to set, e.g. , for 1 hour, to provide the dosage form.
- Representative polymers suitable for manufacturing the dosage form include olefin and vinyl polymers, condensation polymers, carbohydrate polymers, and silicon polymers as represented by poly(ethylene), poly(propylene), poly(vinyl acetate), poly(methyl acrylate), poly(isobutyl methacrylate), poly( alginate), poly( amide), and poly( silicone).
- the polymers and manufacturing procedures are known in Polymers, by Coleman et al, Vol. 31, pp. 1187- 1230 (1990); Drug Carrier Systems, by Roerdink et al, Vol. 9, pp. 57-109 (1989); Adv. Drug Delivery Rev., by Leong et al, Vol. 1, pp. 199-233 (1987); Handbook of Common Polymers, Compiled by Roff et al., (1971) published by CRC Press; and U.S. Pat. No. 3,992,518.
- This subsection describes additional exemplary delivery systems that can be used to deliver any of a large spectrum of compounds ⁇ e.g., drugs, prodrugs, metabolic precursors, etc.), especially those with limited absorption windows in upper GI ⁇ e.g., stomach).
- compounds e.g., drugs, prodrugs, metabolic precursors, etc.
- An exemplary list of compounds that can be delivered using the subject dosage forms and/or delivery devices includes, but not limited to: metformin, acyclovir, ranitidine, riboflavin, chlorthiazide, gabapentin, losartin potassium, ganciclovir, cimetidine, minocycline, fexofenadine, bupropion, orlistat, captopril, diphenhydramine, tripelennamine, chlorpheniramine maleate, promethazine, omeprazole, prostaglandin, carbenoxolane, sucralphate, isosorbide, quinidine, enalapril, nifedipine, verapamil, diltiazem, nadolol, timolol, pindolol, salbutamol, terbutaline, carbuterol, broxaterol, aminophylline, cyclizine, cinnarizine, domperidone, aliza
- the oral solid dosage form is a monolayer matrix tablet 100, containing one or more drug(s), pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally one or more permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single monolithic layer 110.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR) or controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from all sides. The cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 22.
- the oral solid dosage form is a bilayer tablet 200, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in two monolithic layers 210 and 220.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR) or controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 210, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drugs from the other layer 220.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions are incorporated into layer 220.
- This layer may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and/or other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 23.
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet 300, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three monolithic layers 310, 320 and 330.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet is designed to provide controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug from layer 310, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drugs from the other layers 320 and 330.
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions may be incorporated into layers 320 and 330. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 24.
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet with a pre-compressed insert 400, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three layers 410, 420 and 430, and a pre-compressed tablet 440, inserted in layer 410.
- a pre-compressed insert 400 containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three layers 410, 420 and 430, and a pre-compressed tablet 440, inserted in layer 410.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer and the pre- compressed insert.
- the tablet is designed to provide ascending controlled release (aCR) of one or more poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 410 and pre-compressed insert 440, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drugs from layers 420 and 430.
- aCR ascending controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions may be incorporated into layers 420 and 430. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 25.
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet 500, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three monolithic layers 510, 520 and 530.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet layers are designed to provide immediate release (IR) layer 520, and/or controlled release (CR) layer 510, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs, and optionally an extended release (ER) layer 530, of one or more soluble drugs.
- bioadhesive polymer compositions are incorporated into layer 530.
- This layer may option-ally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 26.
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet with a pre-compressed insert 600, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three layers 610, 620 and 630, and a pre-compressed tablet 640, inserted in layer 610, laying approximately on the middle of the bottom layer 630.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer and the pre- compressed insert.
- the tablet layers and the pre-compressed insert are designed to provide immediate release (IR) from layer 620, and ascending controlled release (aCR) from layer 610 and pre-compressed insert 640, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug, and optionally an extended release (ER), from layer 630, of one or more soluble drugs.
- IR immediate release
- aCR controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layer 630.
- This layer may contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 27.
- the oral solid dosage form is a multilayer extended release tablet 700, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four monolithic layers 710, 720, 730 and 740.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet layers are designed to provide immediate release (IR), from layer 720, and controlled release (CR), from layer 710, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs, and optionally an extended release (ER), from layers 730 and/or 740, of one or more soluble drugs.
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 730 and 740. These layers may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- release rate controlling polymer(s) may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- Figure 28 The cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 28.
- the oral solid dosage form is a multilayer extended release tablet with a pre-compressed insert 800, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four monolithic layers, 810, 820, 830 and 840, and a pre-compressed tablet 850, inserted in the center of layer 810.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer and the pre-compressed insert.
- the tablet layers are designed to provide immediate release (IR), from layer 820, and ascending controlled release (aCR), from layer 810 and pre-comrpessed insert 850, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug, and optionally an extended release (ER), layers 830 and/or 840, of one or more soluble drug.
- IR immediate release
- aCR ascending controlled release
- ER extended release
- layers 830 and/or 840 of one or more soluble drug.
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 830 and 840. These layers may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 29.
- the oral solid dosage form is a monolayer matrix tablet, 900, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single monolithic layer 910.
- the tablet may be optionally coated with a release rate-controlling membrane 920, before applying the bioadhesive coating membrane 930.
- the release rate- controlling and bioadhesive membranes, 920 and 930 may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the tablet is designed to provide controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug from all sides.
- CR controlled release
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 30.
- the oral solid dosage form is a monolayer tablet with a pre-compressed insert 1000, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single layer 1010, and a pre-compressed tablet 1020, inserted in the center of that layer.
- the tablet may be optionally coated with a release rate-controlling membrane 1030, before applying the bioadhesive coating membrane 1040.
- the release rate- controlling and bioadhesive membranes 1030 and 1040 may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of the core tablet and the coating membrane(s).
- the tablet is designed to provide controlled release (CR) or ascending controlled release (aCR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug from all sides.
- CR controlled release
- aCR ascending controlled release
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet with granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 1100, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three layers, 1110, 1120 and 1130, and granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 1140, dispersed in layer 1110.
- the multiparticulates are fillm-coated with one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions 1150.
- a release rate- controlling membrane may be optionally applied onto the multiparticulates as a sub-coat before applying the bioadhesive layer.
- a rapidly dissolving non- functional membrane may be applied as a top-coat onto the bioadhesive pellets.
- the topcoat membrane may serve different purposes, including functioning as a moisture and/or oxygen barrier, and isolating the bioadhesive multiparticulates from each other immediately upon the release from the carrying layer 1110.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet is designed to provide controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug from bioadhesive multiparticulates 1140/1150 and possibly layer 1110, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drug from layers 1120 and/or 1130.
- CR controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 1120 and 1130. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 32.
- the oral solid dosage form is a trilayer tablet with granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 1200, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three layers, 1210, 1220 and 1230, and granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 1240, dispersed in layer 1210.
- the multiparticulates are film-coated with one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions 1250.
- a release rate-controlling membrane may be optionally applied onto the multiparticulates as a sub-coat before applying the bioadhesive layer.
- a rapidly dissolving non-functional membrane may be applied as a top-coat onto the bioadhesive pellets.
- the topcoat membrane may serve different purposes, including functioning as a moisture and/or oxygen barrier, and isolating the bioadhesive multiparticulates from each other immediately upon the release from the carrying layer 1210.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR), from layer 1220, and controlled release (CR), from bioadhesive multiparticulates 1240/1250 and possibly layer 1210, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drug from layers 1240 and/or 1250.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 1240 and 1250. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 33.
- the oral solid dosage form is a multilayer extended release tablet with granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini- tableted multiparticulates 1300, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four layers, 1310, 1320, 1330, and 1340, and granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 1350, dispersed in layer 1310.
- the multiparticulates are film-coated with one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions 1360.
- a release rate-controlling membrane may be optionally applied onto the multiparticulates as a sub-coat before applying the bioadhesive layer.
- a rapidly dissolving non-functional membrane may be applied as a top-coat onto the bioadhesive multiparticulates.
- the top-coat membrane may serve different purposes, including functioning as a moisture and/or oxygen barrier, and isolating the bioadhesive multiparticulates from each other immediately upon the release from the carrying layer 1310.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer and the multiparticulates.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR), from layer 1320, and controlled release (CR), from bioadhesive multiparticulates 1350/1360 and possibly layer 1310, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug, and optionally an extended release (ER) of one or more soluble drug from layers 1330 and/or 1340.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- ER extended release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 1330 and 1340. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 34.
- the solid oral dosage form is a longitudinally compressed tablet 1400, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single monolithic layer 1410.
- the tablet is sealed peripherally with a layer of bioadhesive composition 1420, leaving the upper and lower sides, 1430A and 1430B, of the tablet available for drug release.
- the tablet may be coated with a release rate- controlling layer before applying the bioadhesive coating.
- the release rate- controlling and bioadhesive coatings may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- Various drug release profiles, and preferably and more advantageously, zero-order release profiles, can be achieved by tailoring the composition of the core matrix. The cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 35.
- the solid oral dosage form is a longitudinally compressed tablet 1500, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in two monolithic layers, 1510 and 1520.
- the tablet is sealed peripherally with a layer of bioadhesive composition 1530, leaving the upper and lower sides, 1540A and 1540B, of the tablet available for drug release.
- the bioadhesive coating may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1510, and controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble drugs from the other layer 1520.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- the cross- section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 36.
- the solid oral dosage form is a longitudinally compressed tablet 1600, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four monolithic layers, 1610, 1620, 1630 and 1640.
- the tablet is sealed peripherally with a layer of bioadhesive composition 1650, leaving the upper and lower sides, 1660A and 1660B, of the tablet available for drug release.
- the bioadhesive coating may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1610, and controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1640, followed by fast release of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1640.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- Layers 1610 and 1630 are separated by a slow dissolving passive matrix 1620, which may completely dissolve following the depletion of drug(s) from layer 1640.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 37.
- the solid oral dosage form is a longitudinally compressed tablet 1700, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four monolithic layers, 1710, 1720, 1730 and 1740.
- the tablet is sealed peripherally with a layer of bioadhesive composition 1750, leaving the upper and lower sides, 1760A and 1760B, of the tablet available for drug release.
- the bioadhesive coating may have plasticizer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate its rigidity and permeability.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR) or fast controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1710, followed by delayed release of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from layer 1730 in an immediate release (IR) or fast controlled release (CR) fashion.
- Layer 1740 is a slow dissolving passive matrix 1720, which completely dissolves following the depletion of drug(s) from layer 1710.
- Layers 1710 and 1730 are separated by a slow dissolving passive matrix 1720, which may completely dissolve following the depletion of drug(s) from layers 1710 and 1730.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 38.
- the oral solid dosage form 1800 is a hard shell two-piece capsule 1810, containing a monolayer matrix tablet 1820, and a trilayer tablet 1830.
- the monolayer tablet 1820 containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single layer matrix.
- the trilayer tablet 1830 contains one or more drug, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in three monolithic layers, 1840, 1850 and 1860.
- the tablets are designed to provide immediate release (IR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from monolayer tablet 1820, and controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs from trilayer tablet 1830.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 1850 and 1860. These layers may have identical or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 39.
- the oral solid dosage form 1900 is a hard shell two-piece capsule 1910, containing a multiplicity of monolayer matrix tablets, 1920, 1930, 1940, 1950, and 1960.
- the monolayer tablets contains one or more drug, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and optionally one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in a single layer matrix.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each tablet.
- the tablets are designed to provide immediate release (IR) and controlled release (CR) of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drugs.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- the oral solid dosage form is a multilayer extended release tablet with granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini- tableted multiparticulates 2000, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions, formulated in four layers, 2010, 2020, 2030, and 2040, and granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates, 2050, 2060 and 2070, respectively dispersed in layers 2020, 2030, and 2040.
- the multiparticulates may be optionally film-coated with one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions.
- a release rate-controlling membrane may be optionally applied onto the multiparticulates as a sub-coat before applying the bioadhesive layer.
- a rapidly dissolving non-functional membrane may be applied as a top-coat onto the bioadhesive pellets.
- the top-coat membrane may serve different purposes, including functioning as a moisture and/or oxygen barrier, and isolating the bioadhesive multiparticulates from each other immediately upon the release from the carrying layers.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of each layer and the multiparticulates.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR), from layer 2010, and controlled release (CR), from multiparticulates 2050 and possibly layer 2020, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- multiparticulates 2050 and possibly layer 2020 of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug.
- one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug is released from the multiparticulates 2060 and 2070, and their respective layers, 2030 and 2040, in an extended release (ER) fashion.
- One or more bioadhesive polymer compositions is incorporated into layers 2060 and 2070. These layers may have same or different compositions, and may optionally contain release rate controlling polymer(s), pore former(s), and other polymer(s) to regulate their rigidity and permeability.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 41.
- the oral solid dosage form is a monolayer tablet with granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini-tableted multiparticulates 2100, containing one or more drugs, pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or salts thereof, optionally permeation and/or dissolution enhancers, and one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions.
- the tablet is formulated as a single rapidly disintegrating matrix 2110, and contains a solid dispersion of granulated, spheronized, pelletized, or mini- tableted multiparticulates 2120.
- the multiparticulates are film-coated with one or more bioadhesive polymer compositions 2130.
- a release rate-controlling membrane may be optionally applied onto the multiparticulates as a sub-coat before applying the bioadhesive layer.
- a rapidly dissolving non-functional membrane may be applied as a top-coat onto the bioadhesive multiparticulates.
- the top-coat membrane may serve different purposes, including functioning as a moisture and/or oxygen barrier, and isolating the bioadhesive multiparticulates from each other immediately upon the release from the carrying matrix 2110.
- Various drug release profiles can be achieved by tailoring the composition and/or configuration of the matrix and the multiparticulates.
- the tablet is designed to provide immediate release (IR), from matrix 2110, and controlled release (CR), from bioadhesive multiparticulates 2120/2130, of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug.
- IR immediate release
- CR controlled release
- bioadhesive multiparticulates 2120/2130 of one or more soluble, poorly soluble or insoluble drug.
- the cross-section of this dosage form is illustrated in Figure 42.
- the extended / controlled release layer is sandwiched between two backing layers, which backing layers may or may not contain bioadhesive materials (see Examples 27 and 28).
- backing layers On top of one (or both) of the backing layers is an immediate release layer that quickly disintegrates and dissolves.
- Drug release from the extended / controlled release layer is much slower. Due to the presence of the inactive backing layers, drug release from the extended / controlled release layer begins around the exposed edge or side of the sandwiched-in extended / controlled release layer, and gradually goes towards the inner portion of the extended / controlled release layer.
- the thickness and density of the extended / controlled release layer can be designed such, that at certain point, erosion of the extended / controlled release layer will result in the breaking of the tablet into two halves (not necessarily equal halves), thus creating larger erosion surfaces.
- the increased drug release rate towards the end of the drug release period can produce a delayed or ascending release profile, which may be desirable in certain embodiments (see above).
- bioadhesive polymer composition and “bioadhesive polymer material” is intended to encompass both compositions where the polymer itself is bioadhesive, as well as compositions where a non- or poorly bioadhesive polymer is combined with a compound that imparts bioadhesive properties to the composition as a whole, as described in detail herein.
- drug eluting devices of the invention release the drug or prodrug contained therein with zero-order kinetics.
- representative dosage forms include hydrogel matrix containing a plurality of tiny pills or other particles (see Figure 2).
- the hydrogel matrix comprises a hydrophilic polymer, such as selected from a polysaccharide, agar, agarose, natural gum, alkali alginate including sodium alginate, carrageenan, fucoidan, furcellaran, laminaran, hypnea, gum arabic, gum ghatti, gum karaya, gum tragacanth, locust bean gum, pectin, amylopectin, gelatin and a hydrophilic colloid.
- a hydrophilic polymer such as selected from a polysaccharide, agar, agarose, natural gum, alkali alginate including sodium alginate, carrageenan, fucoidan, furcellaran, laminaran, hypnea, gum arabic, gum ghatti, gum karaya, gum tragacanth, locust bean gum, pe
- the hydrogel matrix comprises a plurality of tiny pills or particles (such as 4 to 50), each tiny pill or particle may comprise a different ratio of decarboxylase inhibitor / levodopa, either as first or second IR or the second zero-order release portion, etc.
- the tiny pills or particles may comprise a release rate controlling wall of 0.01 mm to 10 mm thickness to provide for the timed release of drug in different portions.
- wall-forming materials include a triglyceryl ester selected from glyceryl tristearate, glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl dipalmitate, glyceryl laureate, glyceryl didecenoate and glyceryl tridecenoate.
- Other wall forming materials comprise polyvinyl acetate phthalate, methylcellulose phthalate, and microporous vinyl olefins. Procedures for manufacturing tiny pills are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,153; 4,721,613; 4,853,229; 2,996,431 ; 3,139,383 and 4,752,470, which are incorporated by reference herein.
- the drug-releasing beads are characterized by a dissolution profile wherein 0 to 20% of the beads undergo dissolution and release the drug in 0 to 2 hours, 20 to 40% undergo dissolution and release the drug in 2 to 4 hours, 40 to 60% exhibit dissolution and release in 4 to 6 hours, 60 to 80% in 6 to 8 hours, and 80 to 100% in 8 to 10 hours or longer.
- the drug-releasing beads can include a central composition or core comprising a drug and pharmaceutically acceptable composition forming ingredients including a lubricant, antioxidant, and buffer.
- the beads comprise increasing doses of drug, for example, 0.1 mg, 0.2 mg, 0.5 mg, and so forth to a high dose.
- the beads are coated with a release rate-controlling polymer that can be selected utilizing the dissolution profile disclosed above.
- the manufacture of the beads can be adapted from, for example, Liu et al., Inter. J. of Pharm. 112: 105-116, 1994; Liu et al, Inter. J. ofPharm. 112: 117-124, 1994; Pharm. ScL, by Remington, 14th Ed. pp. 1626-1628 (1970); Fincher et al., J. Pharm. Sci. 57: 1825-1835, 1968; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,083,949.
- Another dosage form provided by the invention comprises a multiplicity of layers (see Figures 1, 3, 4, etc.).
- the phrase "multiplicity of layers” typically denotes 2 to 6 layers in contacting lamination (can be more layers if necessary).
- the multiplicity of layers are positioned consecutively, that is, one layer after another in order, with a first exposed layer, the sixth layer in contact with the fifth layer and its exposed surface coated with a drug impermeable polymer.
- the sixth layer is coated with a drug impermeable polymer to insure release of the subject pharmaceutical composition from the first layer to the sixth layer.
- the biodegradable polymers undergo chemical decomposition to form soluble monomers or soluble polymer units.
- the biodegradation of polymers usually involves chemically or enzymatically catalyzed hydrolysis.
- biodegradable polymers acceptable for an increase drug loading in each layer of from 5 to 50 wt % over the first and successive layers wherein the first layer comprises 100 ng.
- Representative biodegradable polymers comprise a member selected from biodegradable poly( amides), poly( amino acids), poly( esters), poly(lactic acid), poly(glycolic acid), poly(orthoesters), poly( anhydrides), biodegradable poly(dehydropyrans), and poly(dioxinones).
- the polymers are known to the art in Controlled Release of Drugs, by Rosoff, Ch. 2, pp. 53-95 (1989); and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,81 1 ,444; 3,962,414; 4,066,747; 4,070,347; 4,079,038; and 4,093,709.
- the invention employs a dosage form comprising a polymer that releases a drug by diffusion, flux through pores, or by rupture of a polymer matrix.
- the drug delivery polymeric system delivers a substantially zero-order release portion of the pharmaceutical composition may optionally comprise an inhibitor / levodopa ratio gradient, wherein the gradient is, for example, a descent in inhibitor / levodopa ratio from a beginning or initial ratio to a final, or lower ratio (comparably less inhibitor).
- the dosage form comprises an exposed surface at the beginning dose and a distant nonexposed surface at the final dose. The nonexposed surface is coated with a pharmaceutically acceptable material impermeable to the passage of drug.
- the dosage form structure provides for a delivery of drug at a relatively sustained level, with an optionally changing ⁇ e.g., decreasing) inhibitor / levodopa ratio from the beginning to the final delivered dose of the second portion of the dosage form.
- the ratio may also be different in the first and second (if present) IR (or other substantially ascending dose portion) according to the instant invention.
- the dosage form matrix can be made by procedures known to the polymer art.
- 3 to 5 or more casting compositions are independently prepared wherein each casting composition comprises a portion of the dosage form, with each portion overlayered from, for example, a high to low inhibitor / levodopa ratio in the zero-order release dosage portion (second portion).
- This provides a series of layers that come together to provide a unit polymer matrix with an optionally varying inhibitor / levodopa ratio gradient.
- the lower ratio portion is cast first followed by laminating with layers of ascending ratio portions to provide a polymer matrix with an inhibitor / levodopa ratio gradient.
- An example of providing a dosage form comprises blending a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, like polyethylene glycol, with a known dose of the subject pharmaceutical composition, and adding it to a silastic medical grade elastomer with a cross-linking agent, like stannous octanoate, followed by casting in a mold. The step is repeated for each successive layer. The system is allowed to set, e.g., for 1 hour, to provide the dosage form.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier like polyethylene glycol
- a silastic medical grade elastomer with a cross-linking agent like stannous octanoate
- Representative polymers suitable for manufacturing the dosage form include olefin and vinyl polymers, condensation polymers, carbohydrate polymers, and silicon polymers as represented by poly(ethylene), poly(propylene), poly(vinyl acetate), poly(methyl acrylate), poly(isobutyl methacrylate), poly( alginate), poly( amide), and poly(silicone).
- the polymers and manufacturing procedures are known in Polymers, by Coleman et al, Vol. 31, pp. 1187- 1230 (1990); Drug Carrier Systems, by Roerdink et al, Vol. 9, pp. 57-109 (1989); Adv. Drug Delivery Rev., by Leong et al, Vol. 1, pp.
- the subject pharmaceutical compositions are delivered by way of a transdermal patch, a buccal patch, or a buccal tablet.
- a patch is generally a flat hollow device with a permeable membrane on one side and also some form of adhesive to maintain the patch in place on the patient's skin, with the membrane in contact with the skin so that the medication can diffuse out of the patch reservoir and into and through the skin.
- the outer side of the patch is formed of an impermeable layer of material, and the membrane side and the outer side are joined around the perimeter of the patch, forming a reservoir for the medication and carrier between the two layers.
- Patch technology is based on the ability to hold an active ingredient in constant contact with the epidermis. Over substantial periods of time, drug molecules, held in such a state, will eventually find their way into the bloodstream. Thus, patch technology relies on the ability of the human body to pick up drug molecules through the skin.
- Transdermal drug delivery using patch technology has recently been applied for delivery of nicotine, in an effort to assist smokers in quitting, the delivery of nitroglycerine to angina sufferers, the delivery of replacement hormones in post-menopausal women, etc.
- These conventional drug delivery systems comprise a patch with an active ingredient such as a drug incorporated therein, the patch also including an adhesive for attachment to the skin so as to place the active ingredient in close proximity to the skin.
- Exemplary patch technologies are available from Ciba-Geigy Corporation and Alza Corporation. Such transdermal delivery devices can be readily adapted for use with the subject pharmaceutical compositions.
- the flux of the subject pharmaceutical compositions across the skin can be modulated by changing either (a) the resistance (the diffusion coefficient), or (b) the driving force (the solubility of the drug in the stratum corneum and consequently the gradient for diffusion).
- Various methods can be used to increase skin permeation by the subject reuptake inhibitors, including penetration enhancers, use of pro-drug versions, superfluous vehicles, iontophoresis, phonophoresis, macroflux with micro projections, and thermophoresis.
- Many enhancer compositions have been developed to change one or both of these factors. See, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos.
- U.S. Pat. No. 4,863,970 shows penetration- enhancing compositions for topical application comprising an active permeant contained in a penetration-enhancing vehicle containing specified amounts of one or more cell-envelope disordering compounds such as oleic acid, oleyl alcohol, and glycerol esters of oleic acid; a C2 or C3 alkanol; and an inert diluent such as water.
- U.S. Pat. No. 4,933,184 discloses the use of menthol as a penetration enhancer
- U.S. Pat. No. 5,229,130 discloses the use of vegetable oil (soybean and/or coconut oil) as a penetration enhancer
- U.S. Pat. No. 4,440,777 discloses the use of eucalyptol as a penetration enhancer.
- the patch preferably comprises a drug-impermeable backing layer.
- drug-impermeable backing layers which may be used for transdermal or medicated patches include films or sheets of polyolefins, polyesters, polyurethanes, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl chlorides, polyvinylidene chloride, polyamides, ethylene- vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), ethylene-ethylacrylate copolymer (EEA), vinyl acetate-vinyl chloride copolymer, cellulose acetate, ethyl cellulose, metal vapor deposited films or sheets thereof, rubber sheets or films, expanded synthetic resin sheets or films, non-woven fabrics, fabrics, knitted fabrics, paper and foils.
- Preferred drug-impermeable, elastic backing materials are selected from polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyurethane, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), plasticized polyvinylchloride, woven and non-woven fabric. Especially preferred is non- woven polyethyleneterephthalate (PET).
- PET polyethylene terephthalate
- EVA ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
- PET ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
- plasticized polyvinylchloride woven and non-woven fabric.
- Other backings will be readily apparent to those skilled artisan.
- the one or more carriers (additives) and/or diluents may be pharmaceutically acceptable.
- pharmaceutically acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filter, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject regulators from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle such as a liquid or solid filter, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject regulators from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
- Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
- materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15)
- Typical excipients to be added to a capsule formulation include, but are not limited to: fillers such as microcrystalline cellulose, soy polysaccharides, calcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, lactose, sucrose, sorbitol, or any other inert filler.
- fillers such as microcrystalline cellulose, soy polysaccharides, calcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, lactose, sucrose, sorbitol, or any other inert filler.
- there can be flow aids such as fumed silicon dioxide, silica gel, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate or any other materials that impart good flow properties.
- a lubricant can also be added if desired, such as polyethylene glycol, leucine, glyceryl behenate, magnesium stearate or calcium stearate.
- the disintegration time of a particular composition may be less than the gastric (or small/large intestinal) retention time.
- the disintegration time of a tablet is at least 25% of the gastric retention time, at least 50% of the gastric retention time or at least 75% of the gastric retention time.
- the disintegration time of a composition may be formulated to effect a substantially zero-order release, over a period of 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 hours, for instance.
- the formulations can conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and can be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include bringing into association the drug with the carrier or diluent which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the agent with the carriers and then, if necessary, dividing the product into unit dosages thereof. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that any vehicle or carrier conventionally employed and which is inert with respect to the active agent, and preferably does not interfere with bioadhesiveness, may be utilized for preparing and administering the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention. Illustrative of such vehicles and carriers are those described, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed. (1990), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Examples of carriers and diluents include pharmaceutically accepted hydrogels such as alginate, chitosan, methylmethacrylates, cellulose and derivatives thereof (microcrystalline cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose), agarose and PovidoneTM, kaolin, magnesium stearate, starch, lactose, sucrose, density-controlling agents such as barium sulfate and oils, dissolution enhancers such as aspartic acid, citric acid, glutamic acid, tartartic acid, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium phosphate, glycine, tricine, Tromethamine, and TRIS.
- pharmaceutically accepted hydrogels such as alginate, chitosan, methylmethacrylates, cellulose and derivatives thereof (microcrystalline cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose), aga
- excipients, carriers or diluents can also be selected to control the time until a dosage form detaches from a mucosal membrane.
- the addition of one or more disintegrating agents will reduce the time until a tablet or drug eluting device detaches.
- an agent that interferes with the mucosa-tablet / device adhesion can be used to control the time until detachment occurs.
- compositions may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are thus capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable acids.
- pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed.
- Representative salts include but are not limited to following: 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, 3-hydroxy-2-naphthoate, 3 -phenyl propionate, acetate, adipate, alginate, amsonate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, besylate, bicarbonate, bisulfate, bitartrate, borate, butyrate, calcium edetate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, camsylate, carbonate, citrate, clavulariate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate, gluceptate, glucoheptanoate, gluconate, glutamate, glycerophosphate, glycollylarsanilate, hemis
- the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional non-toxic salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. Particularly suitable are salts of weak acids.
- such conventional non-toxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydriodic, cinnamic, gluconic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, maleic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic,
- the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases.
- pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
- Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, and magnesium salts and the like.
- Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, tromethamin, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra).
- wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
- antioxidants may also be included.
- examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha- tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
- water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
- oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butyl
- the subject dosage form is administered orally to the gastrointestinal (GI) tract.
- GI gastrointestinal
- the drug it is desirable that the drug not be delivered substantially beyond the desired site of action and eliminated before it has had a chance to exert a topical effect or to pass into the bloodstream, particularly in the context of avoiding the gastric emptying and its adverse contribution to the On-Off effect.
- the subject drug delivery system adhere to the lining of the appropriate viscus, such that its contents can be delivered as a function of proximity and duration of contact.
- An orally ingested product can adhere to either the epithelial surface or the mucus lining of the GI tract.
- a polymeric drug delivery device adhere to the epithelium or to the mucous layer.
- Bioadhesion in the GI tract may proceed in two stages: (1) viscoelastic deformation at the point of contact of the synthetic material into the mucus substrate, and (2) formation of bonds between the adhesive synthetic material and the mucus or the epithelial cells.
- adhesion of polymers to tissues may be achieved by (i) physical or mechanical bonds, (ii) primary or covalent chemical bonds, and/or (iii) secondary chemical bonds ⁇ e.g., ionic).
- Physical or mechanical bonds can result from deposition and inclusion of the adhesive material in the crevices of the mucus or the folds of the mucosa. Secondary chemical bonds, contributing to bioadhesive properties, include dispersive interactions ⁇ e.g., van der Waals interactions) and stronger specific interactions, which include hydrogen bonds.
- the hydrophilic functional groups primarily responsible for forming hydrogen bonds are the hydroxyl and the carboxylic groups.
- gastric residence time is the time required for a dosage form to transit through the stomach to the pyloric sphincter.
- a dosage form of the invention has a gastric residence time of at least 3 hours, at least 4 hours, at least 6 hours, at least 8 hours or at least 12 hours.
- the dosage forms of the invention may also have an increased retention time in the small and/or large intestine, or in the area of the gastrointestinal tract that absorbs the drug contained in the dosage form.
- dosage forms of the invention can be retained in the small intestine (or one or two portions thereof, selected from the duodenum, the jejunum and the ileum) for at least 6 hours, at least 8 hours or at least 12 hours, such as from 16 to 18 hours.
- the increased gastric residence time may not be applicable.
- These dosage forms, as a whole include a bioadhesive polymeric coating that is applied to at least one surface of the tablet or drug eluting device.
- Suitable bioadhesive polymeric coatings are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,197,346, 6,217,908 and 6,365,187 (the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference), and include soluble and insoluble, biodegradable and nonbiodegradable polymers. These can be hydrogels or thermoplastics, homopolymers, copolymers or blends, and/or natural or synthetic polymers.
- the preferred polymers are synthetic polymers, with controlled synthesis and degradation characteristics.
- Particularly preferred polymers are anhydride copolymers of fumaric acid and sebacic acid (P(FA:SA)), which have exceptionally good bioadhesive properties when administered to the GI tract.
- P(FA:SA) copolymers examples include those having a 1 :99 to 99:1 ratio of fumaric acid to sebacic acid, such as 5:95 to 75:25, for example, 10:90 to 60:40 or at least 15:85 to 25:75. Specific examples of such copolymers have a 20:80 or a 50:50 ratio of fumaric acid to sebacic acid.
- Polymers used in dosage forms of the invention produce a bioadhesive interaction (fracture strength) of at least 100 N/m (10 mN/cm ) when applied to the mucosal surface of rat intestine.
- the fracture strength of the dosage forms is advantageously at least 250 N/m 2 , at least 500 N/m 2 or at least 1000 N/m 2 .
- the fracture strength of a polymer- containing dosage form can be from 100 to 500 N/m 2 .
- the forces described herein refer to measurements made upon rat intestinal mucosa, unless otherwise stated. The same adhesive measurements made on a different species of animal will differ from those obtained using rats.
- the fracture strength of dosage forms of the invention on rat intestine is generally at least 125 N/m 2 , such as at least 150 N/m 2 , at least 250 N/m 2 , at least 500 N/m 2 or at least 1000 N/m 2 .
- the fracture strength of a dosage form can be measured according to the methods disclosed by Duchene et al. Briefly, the dosage form is attached on one side to a tensile tester and is contacted with a testing surface ⁇ e.g., a mucosal membrane) on the opposite surface.
- the tensile tester measures the force required to displace the dosage form from the testing surface.
- Common tensile testers include a Texture Analyzer and the Instron tensile tester.
- dosage forms are pressed using flat- faced tooling, 0.3750" (9.525 mm) in diameter. Dosage form weight will depend on composition; in most cases, the dosage forms have a final weight of 200 mg. These dosage forms are then glued to a plastic 10 mm diameter probe using a common, fast-drying cyanoacrylate adhesive. Once the dosage forms are firmly adhered to the probe, the probe is attached to the Texture Analyzer. The Texture Analyzer is fitted with a 1 kg load cell for maximum sensitivity. The following settings are used:
- Test and Post-Test Speeds are as low as the instrument will allow, to ensure a maximum number of data points captured.
- the Pre-Test speed is used only until the probe encounters the Trigger Force; i.e., prior to contacting the tissue.
- the Proportional, Integral, and Differential Gain are set to 0. These settings, when optimized, maintain the system at the Applied Force for the duration of the Contact Time. With soft tissue as a substrate, however, the probe and dosage form are constantly driven into the deformable surface. This results in visible damage to the tissue. Thus, the probe and dosage form are allowed to relax gradually from the Applied Force by setting these parameters to 0. The tracking speed, which is a measure of how rapidly the feedback is adjusted, is also set to 0.
- the tissue on which the dosage forms are tested is secured in the Mucoadhesive Rig; the rig is then completely immersed in a 600 mL Pyrex beaker containing 375 mL of PBS. The tissue is maintained at approximately 37°C for the duration of the test; no stirring is used as the machine can detect the oscillations from the stir bar.
- hydrophilic polymers In the past, two classes of polymers have shown useful bioadhesive properties, hydrophilic polymers and hydrogels.
- hydrophilic polymers those containing carboxylic groups ⁇ e.g., poly[acrylic acid]) exhibit the best bioadhesive properties. It is thus expected that polymers with the highest concentrations of carboxylic groups are preferred materials for bioadhesion on soft tissues.
- the most promising polymers were sodium alginate, carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose and methylcellulose. Some of these materials are water-soluble, while others are hydrogels.
- Rapidly bioerodible polymers such as poly[lactide-co-glycolide], polyanhydrides, and polyorthoesters, whose carboxylic groups are exposed on the external surface as their smooth surface erodes, are particularly suitable for bioadhesive drug delivery systems.
- polymers containing labile bonds such as polyanhydrides and polyesters, are well known for their hydrolytic reactivity. Their hydrolytic degradation rates can generally be altered by simple changes in the polymer backbone.
- Representative natural polymers suitable for the present invention include proteins ⁇ e.g., hydrophilic proteins), such as zein, modified zein, chitin, chitosan, casein, gelatin, gluten, serum albumin, or collagen, and polysaccharides such as cellulose, dextrans, polyhyaluronic acid, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters and alginic acid. These are generally less suitable for use in bioadhesive coatings due to higher levels of variability in the characteristics of the final products, as well as in degradation following administration.
- Synthetically modified natural polymers include alkyl celluloses, hydroxyalkyl celluloses, cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, and nitrocelluloses.
- Representative synthetic polymers for use in bioadhesive coatings include polyphosphazines, poly( vinyl alcohols), polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyacrylamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and copolymers thereof.
- polymers suitable for use in the invention include, but are not limited to, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxybutyl methyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate phthalate, carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose triacetate, cellulose sulfate sodium salt, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(ethyl methacrylate), poly(butyl methacrylate), poly(isobutyl methacrylate), poly(hexyl methacrylate), poly(isodecyl methacrylate), poly(lauryl methacrylate), poly(phenyl methacrylate), poly(methyl acrylate), poly(isopropyl acrylate), poly(isobutyl acrylate), poly(octadecyl acrylate) polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(ethylene glycol), poly(ethylene
- bioerodible polymers for use in bioadhesive coatings include polylactides, polyglycolides and copolymers thereof, poly( ethylene terephthalate), poly(butyric acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co- caprolactone), poly[lactide-co-glycolide], polyanhydrides (e.g., poly(adipic anhydride)), polyorthoesters, blends and copolymers thereof.
- Polyanhydrides are particularly suitable for use in bioadhesive delivery systems because, as hydrolysis proceeds, causing surface erosion, more and more carboxylic groups are exposed to the external surface.
- polylactides erode more slowly by bulk erosion, which is advantageous in applications where it is desirable to retain the bioadhesive coating for longer durations.
- polymers that have high concentrations of carboxylic acid are preferred.
- the high concentrations of carboxylic acids can be attained by using low molecular weight polymers (MW of 2000 or less), because low molecular weight polymers contain a high concentration of carboxylic acids at the end groups.
- the polymers listed above can be obtained from sources such as Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo., Polysciences, Warrenton, Pa., Aldrich, Milwaukee, Wis., Fluka, Ronkonkoma, N. Y., and BioRad, Richmond, Calif, or can alternatively be synthesized from monomers obtained from these suppliers using standard techniques.
- the synthetic polymer is typically selected from polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes, polystyrene, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polylactides, poly(butyric acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, poly(fumaric) anhydride, blends, and copolymers of thereof.
- the synthetic polymer is poly(fumaric-co-sebacic) anhydride.
- polymers suitable for use as bioadhesive polymeric coatings are polymers having a hydrophobic backbone with at least one hydrophobic group pendant from the backbone.
- Suitable hydrophobic groups are groups that are generally non-polar. Examples of such hydrophobic groups include alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups. Preferably, the hydrophobic groups are selected to not interfere and instead to enhance the bioadhesiveness of the polymers.
- a further group of polymers suitable for use as bioadhesive polymeric coatings are polymers having a hydrophobic backbone with at least one hydrophilic group pendant from the backbone.
- Suitable hydrophilic groups are groups that are capable of hydrogen bonding to another functional group.
- Example of such hydrophilic groups include negatively charged groups such as carboxylic acids, sulfonic acids and phosponic acids, positively charged groups such as (protonated) amines and neutral, polar groups such as amides and imines.
- the hydrophilic groups are selected to not interfere and instead to enhance the bioadhesiveness of the polymers.
- the hydrophilic groups can be either directly attached to a hydrophobic polymer backbone or attached through a spacer group.
- a spacer group is an alkylene group, particularly a Ci-C 8 alkyl group such as a C 2 -C 6 alkyl group.
- Preferred compounds containing one or more hydrophilic groups include amino acids (e.g., phenyalanine, tyrosine and derivatives thereof) and amine-containing carbohydrates (sugars) such as glucosamine.
- Polymers can be modified by increasing the number of carboxylic groups accessible during biodegradation, or on the polymer surface.
- the polymers can also be modified by binding amino groups to the polymer.
- the polymers can be modified using any of a number of different coupling chemistries available in the art to covalently attach ligand molecules with bioadhesive properties to the surface-exposed molecules of the polymeric microspheres.
- the attachment of any positively charged ligand, such as polyethyleneimine or polylysine, to a polymer may improve bioadhesion due to the electrostatic attraction of the cationic groups coating the beads to the net negative charge of the mucus.
- the mucopolysaccharides and mucoproteins of the mucin layer are responsible for the negative charge coating.
- Any ligand with a high binding affinity for mucin could also be covalently linked to most polymers with the appropriate chemistry, such as with carbodiimidazole (CDI), and be expected to influence the binding to the gut.
- CDI carbodiimidazole
- polyclonal antibodies raised against components of mucin or else intact mucin, when covalently coupled to a polymer would provide for increased bioadhesion.
- antibodies directed against specific cell surface receptors exposed on the lumenal surface of the intestinal tract would increase the residence time when coupled to polymers using the appropriate chemistry.
- the ligand affinity need not be based only on electrostatic charge, but other useful physical parameters such as solubility in mucin or specific affinity to carbohydrate groups.
- any of the natural components of mucin in either pure or partially purified form to the polymers would increase the solubility of the polymer in the mucin layer.
- useful ligands would include but not be limited to the following: sialic acid, neuraminic acid, n-acetyl-neuraminic acid, n-glycolylneuraminic acid, 4-acetyl-n- acetylneuraminic acid, diacetyl-n-acetylneuraminic acid, glucuronic acid, iduronic acid, galactose, glucose, mannose, fucose, any of the partially purified fractions prepared by chemical treatment of naturally occurring mucin, e.g., mucoproteins, mucopolysaccharides and mucopolysaccharide-protein complexes, and antibodies immunoreactive against proteins or sugar structure on the mucosal surface.
- polyamino acids containing extra pendant carboxylic acid side groups such as polyaspartic acid and polyglutamic acid
- the polyamino chains would increase bioadhesion by means of chain entanglement in mucin strands as well as by increased carboxylic charge.
- certain polymers suitable for the subject invention may be blended with catechol or a catechol derivative.
- Such polymers may be any non-biodegradable or biodegradable polymer.
- the polymers can be homopolymers or copolymers.
- the polymers that are copolymers can be block, alternating or random copolymers.
- the backbone of the bioadhesive polymer is preferably flexible in order to penetrate mucus and/or epithelial tissue.
- the polymer is a hydrophobic polymer.
- the polymer is a biodegradable polymer and is used to form an oral dosage formulation.
- biodegradable polymers suitable for use in the invention include synthetic polymers such as polyhydroxy acids, such as polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, polyesters, polyurethanes, poly(butyric acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(caprolactone), poly(hydroxybutyrate), poly(lactide-co-glycolide) and poly(lactide-co-caprolactone), and natural polymers such as alginate and other polysaccharides, collagen, chemical derivatives thereof (substitutions, additions of chemical groups, for example, alkyl, alkylene, hydroxylations, oxidations, and other modifications routinely made by those skilled in the art), albumin and other hydrophilic proteins, zein, modified zein, chitin, chitosan, and other prolamines and hydrophobic proteins, copolymers and mixtures thereof.
- synthetic polymers such as polyhydroxy acids, such as polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid,
- a bioadhesive polymer is formed by first coupling a compound to a monomer and then polymerizing the coupled monomer.
- the monomers are polymerized to form a polymer, including biodegradable and non-biodegradable polymers.
- Suitable polymers include, but are not limited to: polyanhydrides, polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polyalkylene oxides such as polyethylene glycol and poloxamers, polyalkylene terepthalates such as poly( ethylene terephthalate), polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(vinyl acetate), poly vinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyhydroxy acids, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and copolymers thereof, modified celluloses, alkyl cellulose, hydroxyalkyl celluloses, cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, nitro celluloses, chitosan, chitin, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, hydroxy
- the polymer backbone can be a known bioadhesive polymer that is hydrophilic or hydrophobic.
- Hydrophilic polymers include CARBOPOLTM (a high molecular weight, crosslinked, acrylic acid-based polymers manufactured by NOVEONTM), polycarbophil, pectin, carbomer, cellulose esters, and dextran.
- non-biodegradable polymers especially hydrophobic polymers.
- preferred non-biodegradable polymers include ethylene vinyl acetate, poly(meth)acrylic acid, copolymers of maleic anhydride with other unsaturated polymerizable monomers, poly(butadiene-co-maleic anhydride), polyamides, copolymers and mixtures thereof, and dextran, cellulose and derivatives thereof.
- Hydrophobic polymers include polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, and polyesters such as polycaprolactone.
- the polymer is sufficiently hydrophobic that it is not readily water soluble, for example, the polymer should be soluble up to less than about 1 % w/w in water, preferably less than about 0.1% w/w in water, at room temperature or body temperature.
- the polymer comprises anhydride repeat units, e.g., the polymer is a polyanhydride, such as a poly(anhydride-co-alkene).
- polymers of maleic anhydrides such as copolymers of maleic anhydride with alkenes (e.g., poly(ethylene-co-maleic anhydride), poly(maleic anhydride-co-butadiene), poly(maleic anhydride-co-styrene).
- a copolymer can have more than two repeat units, such as poly(butadiene-co-styrene-co-maleic anhydride).
- Polyanhydrides can be formed from dicarboxylic acids as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,757,128 to Domb et al., herein incorporated by reference.
- Suitable diacids include aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acid, combinations of aromatic, aliphatic and aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic and aliphatic heterocyclic dicarboxylic acids, and aromatic and aliphatic heterocyclic dicarboxylic acids in combination with aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, and aromatic dicarboxylic acids of more than one phenyl group.
- Suitable monomers include sebacic acid (SA), fumaric acid (FA), bis(p-carboxyphenoxy)propane (CPP), isophthalic acid (IPh), and dodecanedioic acid (DD).
- the polymer that forms the backbone of the bioadhesive material a wide range of molecular weights are suitable for the polymer that forms the backbone of the bioadhesive material.
- the molecular weight may be as low as about 200 Da (for oligomers) up to about 2,000 kDa.
- the polymer has a molecular weight of at least 1,000 Da, more preferably at least 2,000 Da, most preferably the polymer has a molecular weight of up to 20 kDa or up to 200 kDa.
- the molecular weight of the polymer may be up to 2,000 kDa.
- the molecular weight is in the range of 20,000 to 1,000,000 Daltons, preferably 20,000 to 200,000 Daltons.
- Polymers that are copolymers can be block, alternating or random copolymers, such as the maleic anhydride copolymer disclosed above.
- Polymers can be crosslinked or uncrosslinked.
- the backbone of bioadhesive polymers is advantageously sufficiently flexible to interpenetrate mucus and/or epithelial tissue, preferably both.
- the range of substitution on the polymer backbone of a bioadhesive polymer varies greatly and depends on the polymer used and the desired bioadhesive strength.
- a butadiene-co-maleic anhydride copolymer that is 100% substituted with D-DOPA will have the same number of D-DOPA molecules per chain length as a 67% substituted ethyl ene-co- maleic anhydride copolymer.
- the polymer backbone has a percent substitution ranging from 1% to 100%, preferably greater than 5%, such as ranging from 5% to 75%.
- the polymers that form the backbone of a bioadhesive polymer contain reactive functional groups that interact with the primary amino moiety of the compound.
- Polymers used in blends preferably have functional groups that are not reactive with the compounds included in the compositions.
- the lack of reactivity can be absolute or can be lack of reactivity under the conditions to which the composition is exposed. b. Reactive Functional Groups
- the polymer or monomer that forms the polymeric backbone of a bioadhesive polymer contains accessible functional groups that easily react with the primary amino moieties contained in the compounds.
- Suitable reactive functional groups include aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acid derivatives, anhydrides (e.g., cyclic anhydrides), alkyl halides, acyl azides, isocyanates, isothiocyanates, and succinimidyl esters.
- a polymer used in a blend (physical mixture) of the invention need not, and preferably does not, contain functional groups to react with a primary amino moiety.
- Sidechains containing Aromatic groups with one or more hydroxyl groups Although this section is entitled "Sidechain Residue Compounds", implying the compounds are covalently attached to a polymer backbone, the compounds described herein are suitable both for attachment to a polymer backbone and for use in a blend (physical mixture), where no covalent bond exists between the polymer and the residue. Aromatic groups containing one or more hydroxyl groups are attached to the polymeric backbone.
- the aromatic groups can be part of a compound that is grafted to the polymer backbone or the aromatic groups may be part of larger sidechains that are grafted to the polymer backbone.
- the aromatic group containing one or more hydroxyl groups is catechol or a derivative thereof.
- the aromatic compound is a polyhydroxy aromatic compound, such as a trihydroxy aromatic compound (e.g. phloroglucinol and benserazide) or a multihydroxy aromatic compound (e.g. tannin).
- the aromatic moiety can also be an aromatic moiety that includes two or more (e.g., three or more) hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, more typically, hydroxyl substituents or substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents.
- a substituent hydrolyzable to a hydroxyl substituent is a substituent, which when cleaved by water (optionally mediated by an enzyme), that leaves a hydroxyl substituent attached to the phenyl ring.
- substituents include esters (-O-C(O)-R), carbamates (-O-C(O)-NRR') and carbonates (-O-C(O)-OR).
- the catechol derivative also generally contains a reactive group, such as an amino, thiol, or halide group.
- Suitable sidechains which can be grafted to the polymer backbone include poly( amino acids), peptides, or proteins, having a molecular weight of 20 kDa or less, where at least 10% of the amino acids contain catechol residues; preferably, greater than 50%, more preferably 75%, and most preferably 100% of the amino acids contain catechol residues.
- Common amino acids with catechol-like residues are phenylanine, tyrosine and tryptophan. Additionally, synthetic amino acids that contain catechol residues may be prepared.
- An exemplary catechol derivative is 3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine (DOPA), which contains a primary amine.
- DOPA 3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine
- L-DOPA is known to be pharmaceutically active and is used as a treatment for Parkinson's disease.
- Tyrosine the immediate precursor of DOPA, which differs only by the absence of one hydroxyl group in the aromatic ring, can also be used. Tyrosine is capable of conversion (e.g. by hydroxylation) to the DOPA form.
- DOPA 3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine
- the aromatic group is an amine-containing aromatic compound, such as an amine-containing catechol derivative.
- sidechain residue compounds include a) an aromatic moiety comprising two or more hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, and b) a primary or secondary amino moiety.
- a subgroup of these compounds is selected such that the cumulative amount of the compound converted to dopamine (i.e., when the compound is not functionalized on (attached to) a polymer backbone) when infused into rat striatum is at least 65% less than for an equimolar amount of L-3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine.
- the compounds used to form residues are selected such that the cumulative amount of the compound converted to dopamine when infused into rat striatum is at least 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., the compound is not converted to dopamine) less than an equimolar amount of L-3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine.
- the cumulative amount of a compound converted to dopamine when infused into rat striatum can be measured according to the method described in Brannan, et al., Brain Res. 718:165-168 (1996), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, a microdialysis probe is lowered into the corpus striatum of anesthetized rats. The probe generally has a tip length of 3 mm and is perfused with an artificial cerebrospinal fluid solution. Concentrations of dopamine in the microdialysis samples are monitored at regular intervals by HPLC or another suitable analytical method. Once the dopamine concentration reaches a basal level, a 1 mM solution of a sidechain residue compound is perfused into the striatum via the probe, with continued monitoring of the dopamine concentration.
- sidechain residue compounds can be selected such that the blood-brain barrier is substantially impermeable to these compounds when present as free molecules (i.e., not covalently attached to a polymer). Typically, less than 10%, such as less than 5%, 4%, 3%, 2% or 1%, of a substantially impermeable compound is able to cross the blood-brain barrier.
- a suitable assay for determining permeability of the blood-brain barrier to a compound is described by Gomes and Soeares-da-Silva in Brain Res. 829:143-150 (1999), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the assay measures the uptake of a compound by immortalized rat capillary cerebral endothelial cells (RBE 4), which represent the blood-brain barrier.
- RBE 4 immortalized rat capillary cerebral endothelial cells
- the endothelial cells are seeded in collagen-treated 24- well plastic culture clusters (16 mm internal diameter) at a density of 40,000 cells per well (20,000 cells/cm 2 ).
- the cell medium is free of fetal bovine serum and basic fibroblast growth factor. Uptake experiments are typically performed 6 days after seeding. On the day of the experiment, the growth medium is aspirated and the cells are washed with Hanks' medium at 4 °C, followed by incubating the cells in Hanks' medium at 37 °C for 30 minutes.
- the cells are incubated for 6 minutes with 2 mL of 1 ⁇ M substrate (e.g., sidechain residue compound) in Hanks' medium. Uptake is terminated by rapid removal of uptake solution with a vacuum pump connected to a Pasteur pipette, followed by a rapid wash with cold Hanks' medium and the addition of 250 ⁇ L of 0.2 mM perchloric acid.
- the acidified samples are stored under appropriate conditions until the substrate concentration is measured (e.g., via HPLC).
- the sidechain residue compounds include all sidechain residue compounds having the moieties discussed above, except L-DOPA and/or DL-DOPA.
- the aromatic moiety is a monocyclic aromatic moiety that includes two or more hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, more typically, hydroxyl substituents or substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents.
- the aromatic moiety is a phenyl moiety that includes two or more (e.g., three or more) hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, more typically, hydroxyl substituents or substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents.
- An exemplary aromatic moiety is catechol. The aromatic moiety can include other substituents in addition to those indicated, but typically does not include additional substituents.
- a substituent hydrolyzable to a hydroxyl substituent is a substituent, which when cleaved by water (optionally mediated by an enzyme), that leaves a hydroxyl substituent attached to the phenyl ring.
- substituents include esters (-O-C(O)- R) and carbonates (-O-C(O)-OR). . .
- the primary or secondary amino moiety can be directly attached to a carbon atom or can be part of a hydrazinyl moiety (-NH-NHR).
- Suitable compounds for forming residues include D-3,4-dihydroxyphenyl alanine (D- DOPA), (D-, L- or a mixture thereof) carbidopa and (D-, L-, or a mixture thereof) benserazide, which have the following structures, respectively:
- Suitable compounds for forming residues include 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl-2- hydrazino-2-m ethyl propanoic acid, 2-aminocarbonyl-amino-3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2- methylpropanoic acid, 2-amino-3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-methyl hydrochloride, 2-amino- 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-methyl propane nitrile, methyl-DOPA, 3-O-methylcarbidopa and 4-O-methylcarbidopa, including enantiomers and mixtures thereof.
- the catechol or catechol derivative is blended with a biodegradable or non-biodegradable polymer to form a bioadhesive composition.
- the polymer is preferably a hydrophobic polymer. Suitable hydrophobic polymers include ethyl cellulose, poly( anhydrides), and polyesters.
- the preferred catechol derivative is 3,4- dihydroxyphenylalanine (DOPA), which contains a primary amine, or carbidopa.
- DOPA 3,4- dihydroxyphenylalanine
- the catechol derivative can be present in an amount from about 0.5% to about 95% by weight of the polymer.
- one or more compounds are grafted onto a polymer backbone.
- Certain compounds used in this method are selected to have a) an aromatic moiety comprising two or more hydroxyl substituents, methoxy substituents, substituents hydrolyzable to hydroxyl substituents, or a combination thereof, and b) a primary or secondary amino moiety.
- the polymeric backbone is typically a non-biodegradable polymer.
- the compound is coupled to individual monomers and then polymerized.
- Chemistry which allows for the conjugation of a polymer or monomer to the compounds described above can be used.
- the polymer or monomer is functionalized through a nucleophilic addition or a nucleophilic substitution reaction, including a Michael-type addition reaction, between the amino group in the compound and the polymer or monomer.
- other procedures can be used in the coupling reaction.
- the compounds are grafted onto the polymer backbone using standard techniques to form the bioadhesive polymer.
- An example of the grafting procedure is schematically depicted in Reaction 1 , which depicts a nucleophilic substitution reaction between a primary amino moiety and a polymer.
- L-DOPA is grafted to maleic anhydride copolymers by reacting the free amine in L-DOPA with the maleic anhydride bond in the copolymer.
- polymers can be used as the backbone of the bioadhesive material.
- Representative polymers include random copolymers (e.g., 1 :1 copolymers) of maleic anhydride with ethylene, vinyl acetate, styrene, or butadiene.
- the variable portions of the backbone structures are designated as the R groups at the bottom of Reaction 1.
- a number of other compounds containing aromatic rings with hydroxy substituents, such as tyrosine or derivatives of catechol can be used in reaction 1.
- the polymers are prepared by conjugate addition of one or more compounds containing a primary or secondary amine moiety to one or more monomers containing an amino reactive group.
- the monomer is an acrylate or a polymer acrylate.
- Particular monomers include a diacrylate such as 1 ,4-butanediol diacrylate; 1 ,3- propanediol diacrylate; 1 ,2-ethanediol diacrylate; 1 ,6-hexanediol diacrylate; 2,5-hexanediol diacrylate; and 1,3-propanediol diacrylate.
- the monomer and the compound containing an aromatic group are each dissolved in an organic solvent (e.g., tetrahydrofuran (THF), CH 2 Cl 2 , methanol (MeOH), ethanol (EtOH), CHCl 3 , hexanes, toluene, benzene, CCl 4 , glyme, diethyl ether, etc.) to form two solutions.
- an organic solvent e.g., tetrahydrofuran (THF), CH 2 Cl 2 , methanol (MeOH), ethanol (EtOH), CHCl 3 , hexanes, toluene, benzene, CCl 4 , glyme, diethyl ether, etc.
- the resulting solutions are combined, and the reaction mixture is heated to yield the desired polymer.
- the molecular weight of the synthesized polymer can be determined by the reaction conditions (e.g., temperature, starting materials, concentration, solvent, etc)
- a monomer such as 1 ,4-phenylene diacrylate or 1 ,4 butanediol diacrylate having a concentration of 1.6 M, and D-DOPA or another primary amine containing aromatic molecule are each dissolved in an aprotic solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF) or dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) to form two solutions, the solutions are mixed in a 1 : 1 molar ratio between the diacrylate and the amine group and heated to 56 0 C to form a bioadhesive material.
- an aprotic solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF) or dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO)
- Exemplary polymers prepared by this method include one or more of the following repeat units, including combinations thereof:
- Bioadhesive compositions of the invention also include blends, which include a polymer and one or more of the compounds identified as suitable sidechain residues above. However, unlike the bioadhesive polymers of the invention, there is typically no covalent bond formed between the sidechain residue compound and the polymer in the bioadhesive compositions (i.e., the polymer does not chemically react with the compound, although hydrogen bonds, ionic bonds and/or van der Waals interactions can occur).
- the sidechain residue compound is not carbidopa. In another embodiment, when the sidechain residue compound is carbidopa, the blend comprises an active agent that is not carbidopa or L-DOPA.
- the polymer itself is not bioadhesive, but the polymer can be bioadhesive (e.g., a polymer with hydrogen bond- forming pendant groups).
- the polymer is a hydrophobic polymer such as a poly(lactone) (e.g., poly(caprolactone), a polyester or a hydrophobic cellulose (e.g., ethyl cellulose)).
- a polymer and one or more sidechain residue compounds are dissolved in a compatible solvent and blended together, such as under an adhesive force of at least 10 mN/cm , at least 25 mN/cm , at least 50 mN/cm or at least 100 mN/cm 2 (e.g., 10-500 mN/cm 2 , 25-100 mN/cm 2 ).
- the solvent is then evaporated, preferably at a controlled temperature and rate of removal.
- the blend can be spray dried or dried at room temperature.
- a mixture of a polymer and one or more sidechain residue compounds are melted at or slightly above the melting point of the polymer, typically while being mixed.
- Both the polymer and sidechain residue compound should be selected such that they are chemically stable (e.g., do not decompose, do not oxidized) at the melting point temperature. After the composition has re-solidified, it can be milled in order to obtain particles of the desired size.
- blends can be prepared by dry mixing of a polymer and one or more sidechain residue compounds, provided that the sidechain residue compound is sufficiently distributed throughout the blend.
- the sufficiency of distribution can be assessed by measuring the bioadhesiveness of the blend; a blend of the invention having a sufficient distribution of sidechain residue compounds has adhesion of at least 10 N/m 2 .
- Blends of a biodegradable or non-degradable polymer with a catechol or catechol derivative can be prepared by mixing, such as by dissolving the polymer and the catechol or catechol derivative in a suitable solvent and then removing the solvent under controlled conditions of temperature and rate of solvent removal.
- the resulting blends can be spray dried or dried at room temperature.
- the blend can be prepared by melt blending the polymer and the catechol or catechol derivative at a temperature corresponding to the melting point of the polymer.
- polycaprolactone can be melt-blended with L-DOPA (m.p. 295°C) at a temperature of 58-60 0 C, which corresponds to the meting point of polycaprolactone.
- the blends can be also coated onto a substrate using melt extrusion, a fluidized bed, or any method of coating known in the art.
- the catechol or catechol derivative is present in amount from about 0.5% to about 95% by weight of the polymer.
- additional components can be added to the mixture prior to dissolution, melting and/or mixing.
- the additional components should be stable under the conditions the mixture is exposed to.
- active agents should be stable at the melting point temperature if that method is employed.
- the weight ratio of polymer to sidechain residue compound in a blend can be selected to give the desired amount of bioadhesion.
- the weight ratio of sidechain residue compound to polymer is 0.5% to 95% by weight, such as 5% to 75% or 25% to 75%.
- the invention includes a bioadhesive material comprising one of the bioadhesive polymers or polymer blends (often referred to collectively hereinbelow as “bioadhesive polymers”) described herein and an additive that stabilizes the polymeric component from erosion, dissolution or both, where at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive material remains, e.g., after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- bioadhesive material comprising one of the bioadhesive polymers or polymer blends (often referred to collectively hereinbelow as “bioadhesive polymers”) described herein and an additive that stabilizes the polymeric component from erosion, dissolution or both, where at least 50% by weight of a 1 mm thick film of the bioadhesive material remains, e.g., after 12 hours in a buffered pH 4.5 dissolution bath.
- the bioadhesive material film is exposed to the dissolution bath for 6 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, 12 hours, 14 hours, 16 hours, 18 hours, 20 hours, 24 hours or longer.
- the amount of bioadhesive material film remaining after exposure to the dissolution bath is at least 50% by weight, at least 60% by weight, at least 70% by weight, at least 80% by weight, at least 90% by weight, at least 95% by weight, at least 97% by weight, at least 98% by weight or even at least 99% by weight of the polymer prior to exposure.
- a suitable dissolution bath, a USP II apparatus, is described below in the Examples.
- the dissolution bath is stirred at 50 rpm and the temperature is 37° C.
- the bioadhesive polymers are stabilized against erosion by incorporating one or more additives selected from (1) polyanhydrides, such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000, (2) acidic components (including precursors thereof), (3) metal compounds, (4) stabilizing polymers, and (5) hydrophobic components.
- polyanhydrides such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- acidic components including precursors thereof
- metal compounds including precursors thereof
- stabilizing polymers such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- hydrophobic components such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- polyanhydrides such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- metal compounds including precursors thereof
- stabilizing polymers such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- hydrophobic components such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of 20,000
- hydrophobic components such as those having a molecular weight average in excess of
- Polymers may be synthesized from highly pure isolated prepolymers formed from: aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, combinations of aromatic, aliphatic and aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic and aliphatic heterocyclic dicarboxylic acids and aromatic and aliphatic heterocyclic dicarboxylic acids in combination with aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic-aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, and aromatic dicarboxylic acids of more than one phenyl group.
- the following monomers are suitable for synthesizing bioadhesive copolymers: bis(p- carboxyphenoxy)alkanes; hydroquinone-O,O' diacetic acid; 1 ,4-bis-carboxymethyl benzene; 2,2-bis(4-hydroxphenyl)propane-O,O'-diacetic acid; 2,2-bis(4-carboxyphenyl)propane; terephthalic acid; bis(4-carboxyphenyl)alkanes; 1 ,4-phenylene dipropionic acid; cyclohexane dicarboxylic acids, adipic acid, sebacic acid (SA), bis(p-carboxyphenoxy)propane (CPP), isophthalic acid (IPh), and dodecanedioic acid (DD).
- SA sebacic acid
- CPP bis(p-carboxyphenoxy)propane
- IPh isophthalic acid
- DD dodecan
- a particular polyanhydride is poly(fumaric acid-co-sebacic acid) (pFA:SA) (e.g., a 20:80 copolymer of p(FA:SA)).
- Another particular polyanhydride is polyadipic anhydride.
- anhydride oligomer refers to a diacid or polydiacid linked by anhydride bonds, and having carboxy end groups linked to a monoacid such as acetic acid by anhydride bonds.
- the anhydride oligomers have a molecular weight less than about 5000, typically between about 100 and 5000 daltons, or are defined as including between one to about 20 diacid units linked by anhydride bonds.
- the anhydride oligomer is hydrolytically labile. As analyzed by gel permeation chromatography, the molecular weight may be, for example, on the order of 200-400 for fumaric acid oligomer (FAPP) and 2000-4000 for sebacic acid oligomer (SAPP).
- the diacids are those normally found in the Krebs glycolysis cycle.
- the anhydride oligomer compounds preferably have high chemical reactivity.
- Anhydride oligomers can be incorporated into a polyanhydride by combining a finely ground dispersion of particles of oligomer in a solution or dispersion with the polyanhydride.
- the oligomer compound can be incorporated into the polymer by dispersing the polyanhydride in a solution or dispersion of the oligomer compound and then removing the solvent by evaporation or filtration.
- the amount of polyanhydride added to a bioadhesive polymer is from about 0.5% to about 75% by weight, preferably about 5% to about 50% and more preferably about 10% to about 25%.
- the bioadhesive polymers can additionally be stabilized by the incorporation of a small molecule (i.e., non-polymeric or oligomeric) acidic component, preferably a slow release acidic component.
- the acid is a weak organic acid, for example, an acid having a pKa of about 1 to about 7, such as about 1 to about 5.5, typically about 1.2 to 4.5.
- the acid is poorly soluble in water as defined in the USP, but miscible with the bioadhesive polymer.
- the acid may contain one or more carboxylic, phosphonic, phosphoric, sulfonic, sulfinic or sulfenic acid moieties, preferably two or more acid moieties.
- the acid contains two or more carboxylic acid moieties.
- exemplary acids include succinic acid, fumaric acid, citric acid, sebacic acid, adipic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid, tartaric acid and sorbic acid.
- the acid is not citric acid.
- the acid is not citric acid, fumaric acid, sebacic acid or lactic acid.
- the acid is not a sugar. A combination of two or more such acids may be incorporated into a polymer.
- the acid may be an acid precursor, such as an anhydride.
- An acid precursor is a molecule that is hydrolyzed or metabolized into an acid.
- Suitable anhydrides includes symmetrical anhydrides (e.g., acetic anhydride, cyclohexanecarboxylic anhydride, hexanoic anhydride, chloroacetic anhydride, thiobenzoic anhydride, thiopropionic anhydride, 2- chloroethanesulfinic anhydride, benzenesulfonic anhydride and cyclic anhydrides formed from two acid groups attached to the same molecule such as succinic anhydride, cyclohexane- 1,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic acid 3,4-anhydride and phthalic anhydride), unsymmetrical (mixed) anhydrides (e.g., acetic propionic anhydride, benzoic thioacetic anhydride, acetic chloroacetic anhydr
- the anhydride is succinic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride, adipic anhydride, butyric anhydride, isobutyric anhydride, propionic anhydride or another carboxylic acid anhydride. More preferably, the anhydride is succinic anhydride.
- the acids advantageously are present in a bioadhesive polymer for an extended period of time (e.g., not washed away in an aqueous environment), which is typically achieved either by virtue of low water solubility or by virtue of coating the acids with an appropriate coating.
- Such acids are collectively referred to herein as slow-release acid components.
- Acids selected on the basis of solubility typically have a solubility in water of less than 10 mg/mL at pH 4.5 and below.
- Coatings for an acid are selected such that they do not appreciably dissolve at pH 4.5 or below or such that they coat the acid until the formulation (i.e., polymer) into which the coated acid is incorporated has passed through the stomach (e.g., an enteric coating).
- the amount of an acidic component (including acid precursors) added to a bioadhesive polymer is from about 0.5% to about 75% by weight, such as about 1% to about 65%, preferably about 5% to about 50% (about 5% to about 45%, about 10% to about 30%) and more preferably about 10% to about 25%.
- bioadhesive polymers described above can also be stabilized by the incorporation of a metal compound, as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,985,312 to Jacob et al.
- the metal compounds preferably are water-insoluble metal compounds, such as water-insoluble metal oxides and hydroxides, including oxides of calcium, iron, copper and zinc.
- the metal compounds can be combined with a wide range of hydrophilic and hydrophobic polymers including proteins, polysaccharides and synthetic biocompatible polymers.
- Metal compounds which can be incorporated into polymers preferably are water- insoluble metal compounds, such as water-insoluble metal oxides and metal hydroxides, which are capable of becoming combined with a polymer to thereby improve the bioadhesiveness of the polymer.
- a water-insoluble metal compound is defined as a metal compound with little or no solubility in water, for example, less than about 0.0 to 0.9 mg/ml.
- the water-insoluble metal compounds can be derived from a wide variety of metals, including, but not limited to, calcium, iron, copper, zinc, cadmium, zirconium and titanium.
- the water insoluble metal compound preferably is a metal oxide or hydroxide. Water insoluble metal compounds of multivalent metals are preferred.
- Representative metal oxides suitable for use in the compositions described herein include cobalt oxide (I) (CoO), cobalt oxide (H)(Co 2 O 3 ), selenium oxide (SeO 2 ), chromium double oxide (CrO 2 ), manganese oxide (MnO 2 ), titanium oxide (TiO 2 ), lanthanum oxide (La 2 O 3 ), zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), scandium oxide (Sc 2 O 3 ), beryllium oxide (BeO), tantalum oxide (Ta 2 O 5 ), cerium oxide (CeO 2 ), neodymium oxide (Nd 2 O 3 ), vanadium oxide (V 2 O 5 ), molybdenum oxide (Mo 2 O 3 ), tungsten oxide (WO), tungsten trioxide (WO 3 ), samarium oxide (Sm 2 O 3 ), europium oxide (Eu 2 O 3 ), gadolinium oxide (Gd 2 O 3
- oxides include barium oxide (BaO), calcium oxide (CaO), nickel oxide (III) (Ni 2 O 3 ), magnesium oxide (MgO), iron oxide (II) (FeO), iron oxide (III) (Fe 2 O 3 ), copper oxide (II) (CuO), cadmium oxide (CdO), and zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ).
- the metal compound is ferric oxide, copper oxide or zinc oxide or a combination thereof.
- the metal compound is a zirconate, such as magnesium zirconate or calcium zirconate.
- the metal compound is a silicate, such as magnesium silicate (e.g., a hydrated magnesium silicate such as talc) or calcium silicate.
- a silicate such as magnesium silicate (e.g., a hydrated magnesium silicate such as talc) or calcium silicate.
- metal compounds which are incorporated into polymers are metal compounds which are already approved by the FDA or an equivalent agency as either food or pharmaceutical additives, such as zinc oxide or talc.
- the water-insoluble metal compounds can be incorporated into a polymer by, for example, one of the following mechanisms: (a) physical mixtures which result in entrapment of the metal compound; (b) ionic interaction between metal compound and polymer; (c) surface modification of the polymers which would result in exposed metal compound on the surface; and (d) coating techniques such as fluidized bed, pan coating, or any similar methods known to those skilled in the art, which produce a metal compound enriched layer on the surface of the device.
- nanoparticles or microparticles of the water- insoluble metal compound are incorporated into the polymer, preferably as a uniform dispersion.
- Fine metal oxide particles can be produced, for example, by micronizing a metal oxide by mortar and pestle treatment to produce particles ranging in size, for example, from 10.0 to 300 nm.
- the metal oxide particles can be incorporated into a polymer, for example, by dissolving or dispersing the particles into a solution or dispersion of the polymer.
- Metal compounds are optionally coated with a protective coating, such as an enteric coating or a rate controlling coating. Such coatings are selected in order to release the metal compound only when the system is exposed to gastric fluid or another targeted environment.
- a protective coating such as an enteric coating or a rate controlling coating.
- Such coatings are selected in order to release the metal compound only when the system is exposed to gastric fluid or another targeted environment.
- the amount of a metal compound added to a bioadhesive polymer is from about 1% to about 65% by weight, preferably about 5% to about 45% and more preferably about 10% to about 30%.
- bioadhesive polymers described above can also be stabilized by the incorporation of certain polymers, particularly a hydrophilic polymer (hydrogel) that forms a rigid gel at pH 4.5 and higher or a hydrophobic polymer.
- a hydrogel has little or no swelling at pH 4.5 or less.
- suitable polymers includes polymers with pendant hydroxyl, carboxylic acid, amine, amide and/or urea moieties (or, more generally, hydrogen bond donors and/or acceptors).
- stabilizing polymers include polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylamide, polyacrylonitrile, polymethacrylic acid, polyacrylic acid (e.g., Carbomer), alginate (e.g., sodium alginate), chitin, chitosan, zein and shellac.
- the hydrogel is Carbomer or an alginate.
- the stabilizing polymer is not an alginate.
- the stabilizing polymer is not ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate and/or zein.
- Stabilizing polymers can be combined with a bioadhesive polymer by combining a finely ground dispersion of particles in a solution or dispersion with the bioadhesive polymer.
- the stabilizing polymer can be combined with the bioadhesive polymer by dispersing the bioadhesive polymer in a solution or dispersion of the hydrogel and then removing the solvent by evaporation or filtration.
- the amount of a stabilizing polymer added to a bioadhesive polymer is from about 1% to about 90% by weight, preferably about 5% to about 70% and more preferably about 10% to about 50%.
- Hydrophobic Components e. Hydrophobic Components
- the bioadhesive polymers described above can also be stabilized by combination with one or more hydrophobic components.
- hydrophobic small molecules include waxy materials (e.g., carnauba wax, beeswax, Chinese wax, spermaceti, lanolin, bayberry wax, Candelilla wax, castor wax, esparto wax, Japan wax, jojoba oil, ouricury wax, rice bran wax, ceresin waxes, montan wax, ozocerite, peat waxes, paraffin wax, polyethylene waxes) and polyglycerol fatty acid esters.
- waxy materials e.g., carnauba wax, beeswax, Chinese wax, spermaceti, lanolin, bayberry wax, Candelilla wax, castor wax, esparto wax, Japan wax, jojoba oil, ouricury wax, rice bran wax, ceresin waxes, montan wax, ozocerite, peat wax
- the amount of a hydrophobic component added to a bioadhesive polymer is from about 1% to about 25% by weight, preferably about 2% to about 10%.
- the stability of bioadhesive polymers can also be enhanced by incorporating materials from two or more of the classes of materials described above.
- the invention includes combinations including: (1) a polyanhydride and an acidic component, (2) a polyanhydride and a metal compound, (3) a polyanhydride and a stabilizing polymer, (4) a polyanhydride and a hydrophobic component, (5) an acidic component and a metal compound, (6) an acidic component and a stabilizing polymer, (7) an acidic component and a hydrophobic component, (8) a metal compound and a stabilizing polymer, (9) a metal compound and a hydrophobic component, (10) a stabilizing polymer and a hydrophobic component, (11) a polyanhydride and an acidic component and a metal compound, (12) a polyanhydride and an acidic component and a stabilizing polymer, (13) a polyanhydride and an acidic component and a hydrophobic component, (14) a polyanhydride and a metal compound
- Bioadhesive materials described herein may be used in a wide variety of drug delivery, tissue engineering and other medical and diagnostic applications.
- Bioadhesive materials may be formed into microparticles, such as microspheres or microcapsules, or may be a coating on such microparticles.
- the bioadhesive materials may be applied to tissue engineering matrices or medical implants.
- the material is applied as a coating to a solid oral dosage formulation, such as a tablet, capsule, drug eluting device or multiparticulates.
- the coating may be applied by direct compression or by applying a solution containing the material to the tablets or capsules.
- the bioadhesive material is in the matrix of a tablet or other drug delivery device.
- the tablet or drug delivery device contains a coating, such as a coating containing the bioadhesive material or another bioadhesive polymer or an enteric coating.
- Bioadhesive materials used as coatings preferably do not appreciably swell upon hydration, such that they do not substantially inhibit or block movement (e.g., of ingested food) through the gastrointestinal tract, as compared to the polymers disclosed by Duchene et al.
- polymers that do not appreciably swell upon hydration include one or more hydrophobic regions, such as a polymethylene region (e.g., (CH 2 ) n , where n is 4 or greater).
- the swelling of a polymer can be assessed by measuring the change in volume when the polymer is exposed to an aqueous solution. Polymers that do not appreciably swell upon hydration expand in volume by 50% or less when fully hydrated.
- such polymers expand in volume by less than 25%, less than 20%, less than 15%, less than 10% or less than 5%.
- a polymer that does not appreciably swell upon hydration can be mixed with a polymer that does swell (e.g., CarbopolTM, poly(acrylic acid), provided that the amount of swelling in the polymer does not substantially interfere with bioadhesiveness.
- the bioadhesive coating consists of two layers, an inner bioadhesive layer that does not substantially swell upon hydration and an outer bioadhesive layer that is readily hydratable and optionally bioerodable, such as one comprised of CARBOPOLTM.
- a tablet or a drug eluting device can have one or more coatings in addition to the bioadhesive coating. These coatings and their thickness can, for example, be used to control where in the gastrointestinal tract the bioadhesive coating becomes exposed. In one example, the additional coating prevents the bioadhesive coating from contacting the mouth or esophagus. In another example, the additional coating remains intact until reaching the small intestine.
- coatings include methylmethacrylates, zein, modified zein, chitin, chitosan, cellulose acetate, cellulose phthalate, HPMC, sugars, enteric polymers, gelatin and shellac. Premature dissolution of a tablet in the mouth can be prevented with hydrophilic polymers such as HPMC or gelatin.
- Coatings used in tablets of the invention typically include a pore former, such that the coating is permeable to the drug.
- Tablets, capsules and drug eluting devices of the invention can be coated by a wide variety of methods. Suitable methods include compression coating, coating in a fluidized bed or a pan, hot melt (extrusion) coating and enrobing. Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art.
- the bioadhesive material is used in drug depot or reservoir systems, such as an osmotic drug delivery system.
- the bioadhesive material is present in a matrix surrounding the drug to be delivered and/or as a coating on the surface of the system.
- the depot or reservoir systems contain a microporous or macroporous membrane that separates the outside environment from the drug inside the system.
- the osmotic delivery system contains osmotic agents, which bring water into the system, causing a swellable material, such as a polymeric matrix or separate polymeric layer, to swell. When the material inside the system swells, it pushes the drug against the semipermeable membrane and out of the system.
- the bioadhesive coating adheres to the mucosa in the aqueous environment of the gastrointestinal tract.
- the bioavailability of therapeutic agents is enhanced through increased residence time at the target absorption rate.
- the solid oral dosage form contains rate controlling agents, such as hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose (HPMC) and microcrystalline cellulose (MCC).
- the drug may be in the form or microparticles or nanoparticles.
- a tablet contains a core containing a nanoparticulate drug and enhancers in a central matrix of rate controlling agents, such as hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose (HPMC) and microcrystalline cellulose (MCC).
- the core is surrounded on its circumference by bioadhesive polymer or composition of the invention.
- the final tablet is coated with an enteric coating, such as Eudragit Ll 00-55, to prevent release of the drug until the tablet has moved to the small intestine.
- the bioadhesive materials may be used in or as a coating on prosthetics, such as dental prosthetics.
- the materials may be used as dental adhesives, or bone cements and glues.
- the materials are suitable for use in wound healing applications, such as synthetic skins, wound dressings, and skin plasters and films.
- bioadhesive materials can be added to a composition.
- Such components include bioadhesive modifiers, solvents, thermoplastic polymers and plasticizers.
- Bioadhesive materials can be mixed with one or more plasticizers or thermoplastic polymers. Such agents typically increase the strength and/or reduce the brittleness of polymeric coatings.
- Plasticizers can be hydrophobic or hydrophilic.
- plasticizers include dibutyl sebacate, polyethylene glycol, triethyl citrate, dibutyl adipate, dibutyl fumarate, diethyl phthalate, ethylene oxide-propylene oxide block copolymers such as PluronicTM F68 and di(sec-butyl) fumarate.
- thermoplastic polymers include polyesters, poly(caprolactone), polylactide, poly(lactide-co- glycolide), methyl methacrylate (e.g., EUDRAGITTM), cellulose and derivatives thereof such as ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate and hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) and large molecular weight polyanhydrides.
- the plasticizers and/or thermoplastic polymers are mixed with a bioadhesive polymer to achieve the desired properties.
- the proportion of plasticizers and thermoplastic polymers, when present, is from 0.5% to 50% by weight.
- Bioadhesive modifiers include both natural and synthetic bioadhesive modifiers, which can be swellable or non-swellable and gellable or non-gellable.
- Swellable modifiers include fluid-imbibing displacement polymers (osmopolymers), such as poly(alkylene oxide), hydrogels (CARBOPOL ® ), polyacrylamide, crosslinked poly(indene-co-maleic anhydride), poly(acrylic acid), polysaccharides and polyglucan.
- Gellable or non-gellable modifiers include karaya gum, guar gum, okra gum, gum arabic, acacia gum, pectina gum, ghatti gum, tragacanth gum, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, psyllium seed gum, tamarind gum, destria gum, casein gum and other gums.
- Natural bioadhesive modifiers include cellulose compounds (cellulose, ethylcellulose, methylcellulose, nitrocellulose, propylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, including alkyl and hydroxyalkyl derivatives), karaya gum, prolamines (zein), L-DOPA, benserazide, carbidopa, dopamine, 3-O-methyldopa and other L-DOPA metabolites.
- the natural bioadhesive modifiers exclude L-DOPA and/or its metabolites.
- bioadhesive modifiers can, for example, be blended with the bioadhesive materials of the invention during the preparation of a pharmaceutical composition.
- a bioadhesive modifier is generally blended with a bioadhesive material though dry or wet mixing prior to tablet preparation.
- bioadhesive polymers and compositions such as those named above, having a metal compound combined therewith have a further improved ability to adhere to tissue surfaces, such as mucosal membranes.
- the metal compound combined with the polymer can be, for example, a water-insoluble metal oxide.
- Metal compounds which can be incorporated into polymers to improve their bioadhesive properties preferably are water-insoluble metal compounds, such as water- insoluble metal oxides and metal hydroxides, which are capable of becoming incorporated into and associated with a polymer to thereby improve the bioadhesiveness of the polymer.
- a water-insoluble metal compound is defined as a metal compound with little or no solubility in water, for example, less than about 0.0 to 0.9 mg/ml.
- the water-insoluble metal compounds can be derived from a wide variety of metals, including, but not limited to, calcium, iron, copper, zinc, cadmium, zirconium and titanium.
- the water insoluble metal compound preferably is a metal oxide or hydroxide. Water insoluble metal compounds of multivalent metals are preferred.
- Representative metal oxides suitable for use in the compositions described herein include cobalt (I) oxide (CoO), cobalt (II) oxide (Co 2 O 3 ), selenium oxide (SeO 2 ), chromium (IV) oxide (CrO 2 ), manganese oxide (MnO 2 ), titanium oxide (TiO 2 ), lanthanum oxide (La 2 O 3 ), zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), scandium oxide (Sc 2 O 3 ), beryllium oxide (BeO), tantalum oxide (Ta 2 O 5 ), cerium oxide (CeO 2 ), neodymium oxide (Nd 2 O 3 ), vanadium oxide (V 2 O 5 ), molybdenum oxide (Mo 2 O 3 ), tungsten oxide (WO), tungsten trioxide (WO 3 ), samarium oxide (Sm 2 O 3 ), europium oxide (Eu 2 O 3 ), gadolinium oxide (Gd
- oxides include barium oxide (BaO), calcium oxide (CaO), nickel oxide (III) (Ni 2 O 3 ), magnesium oxide (MgO), iron (II) oxide (FeO), iron (III) oxide (Fe 2 O 3 ), copper oxide (II) (CuO), cadmium oxide (CdO), and zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ).
- Preferred properties defining the metal compound include: (a) substantial insolubility in aqueous environments, such as acidic or basic aqueous environments (such as those present in the gastric lumen); and (b) ionizable surface charge at the pH of the aqueous environment.
- the water-insoluble metal compounds can be incorporated into the material by one of the following mechanisms: (a) physical mixtures which result in entrapment of the metal compound; (b) ionic interaction between metal compound and polymer; (c) surface modification of the polymers which would result in exposed metal compound on the surface; and (d) coating techniques such as fluidized bed, pan coating, or any similar methods known to those skilled in the art, which produce a metal compound enriched layer on the surface of the device.
- nanoparticles or microparticles of the water-insoluble metal compound are incorporated into the polymer.
- metal compounds which are incorporated into materials to improve their bioadhesive properties can be metal compounds which are already approved by the FDA as either food or pharmaceutical additives, such as zinc oxide.
- Bioadhesive materials with further enhanced bioadhesive properties can be obtained by incorporating anhydride monomers or oligomers into one of the bioadhesive materials disclosed herein by dissolving, dispersing, or blending, as taught by U.S. Patent Nos. 5,955,096 and 6,156,348, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the anhydride oligomers are formed from organic diacid monomers, preferably the diacids normally found in the Krebs glycolysis cycle.
- Anhydride oligomers which enhance the bioadhesive properties of a polymer have a molecular weight of about 5000 or less, typically between about 100 and 5000 daltons, or include 20 or fewer diacid units linked by anhydride linkages and terminating in an anhydride linkage with a carboxylic acid monomer.
- the oligomer excipients can be blended or incorporated into a wide range of hydrophilic and hydrophobic polymers including proteins, polysaccharides and synthetic biocompatible polymers, including those described above.
- anhydride oligomers may be combined with metal oxide particles, such as those described above, to improve bioadhesion even more than with the organic additives alone.
- Organic dyes because of their electronic charge and hydrophobicity or hydrophilicity, can either increase or decrease the bioadhesive properties of polymers when incorporated into the polymers.
- anhydride oligomer refers to a diacid or polydiacid linked by anhydride bonds, and having carboxy end groups linked to a monoacid such as acetic acid by anhydride bonds.
- the anhydride oligomers have a molecular weight less than about 5000, typically between about 100 and 5000 daltons, or are defined as including between one to about 20 diacid units linked by anhydride bonds.
- the diacids are those normally found in the Krebs glycolysis cycle.
- the anhydride oligomer compounds have high chemical reactivity.
- Control of the rate that an active drug e.g., a sustained release or controlled delivery form of a drag
- a targeted delivery site e.g., site of absorption
- excipients such as polymeric excipients.
- the exact mechanism by which a polymer interacts with the mucosa or controls the delivery of the drag is at least partially dependent on the rate of polymer hydration and swelling, which is related to its molecular weight. Therefore, any process that significantly reduces the molecular weight of the polymer is likely to affect its ability to control the drag delivery. Oxidative degradation can lead to a loss in molecular weight for several polymers commonly used in controlled release applications (Waterman, K.
- polystyrene resin et. al., Pharm. Dev. Technol., 2002, 1-312.
- degradation in polymers can produce reactive impurities and end groups to compromise the chemical stability of drags and also their effectiveness as a bioadhesive polymer or release controlling agent.
- An example of class of controlled release polymers that can degrade to compromise the drag release rate is the polyoxyethylenes, including poly( ethylene oxides) (PolyoxTM), poly( ethylene glycols), and poly(oxyethylene) alkyl ethers.
- the polyethylene oxide is usually treated by the manufacturer (Dow chemicals) with 100-1000 ppm of butylated hydroxy toluene (BHT) to reduce such degradation.
- BHT butylated hydroxy toluene
- antioxidants or chelating agents can reduce formation of peroxides, but may be less effective in eliminating of peroxides already present in a dosage form.
- the marketed form of bupropion hydrochloride is stabilized with an antioxidant like L-cysteine hydrochloride.
- chelating agents such as citric acid, edetic acid, fumaric acid and malic acid are recommended for inhibition of any metal induced oxidation. Chelating agents are generally more effective when added during a granulation step or by coating particles using fluid bed technology, rather than simply during physical mixing. Suitable antioxidants and chelating agents are disclosed in U.S.
- the pH to which a polymer is exposed can play a significant role in the stabilization of the polymer to oxidation. It is in general more difficult to remove an electron from a polymer when it is positively charged. For this reason, stability against oxidation is often greater under low pH conditions, which promote protonation of polymers if protonation is possible. In the converse, higher pH conditions, which deprotonate a polymer, generally make a drug more susceptible to oxidation.
- U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,358,970; 5,541,231; 5,731,000 and 5,763,493 to Ruffe/ ⁇ / the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, describe a stabilized bupropion hydrochloride formulation having a stabilizer selected from group consisting of L-cysteine hydrochloride, glycine hydrochloride, malic acid, sodium metabisulfite, citric acid, tartaric acid, L-cystine dihydrochloride, ascorbic acid, and isoascorbic(erythorbic) acid.
- Such stabilizers are useful herein as antioxidants and/or chelating agents.
- U.S. Pat. No. 6,652,882 to Odidi et. al describes stabilization of drug by a saturated polyglycolised glyceride like Gelucire M , and such compounds are suitable for use in the present invention.
- oxidation stabilization strategies for bupropion formulations include the addition of inorganic acids like hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, nitric acid and sulfuric acid (U.S. Pat. No. 5,968,553, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference); dicarboxylic acids like oxalic acid, succinic acid, adipic acid, fumaric acid, benzoic acid and phthalic acid (U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,194,002; 6,221,917; 6,242,496; 6,482,987 and 6,652,882, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference); sulfites like potassium metabisulfite and sodium bisulfite (U.S. Pat.
- antioxidants used in the present invention are selected from ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, malic acid, propyl gallate, sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, sodium metabisulfite, potassium metabisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium thiosulfate, sodium formaldehyde sulfoxylate, L-ascorbic acid, D-ascorbic acid, acetylcysteine, cysteine, thioglycerol, thioglycollic acid, thiolactic acid, thiourea, dithiothreitol, dithioerythreitol, glutathione, nordihydroguaiaretic acid, tocopherol, fumaric acid and succinic acid.
- acidification refers to any method of lowering the pH of the bioadhesive polymers either before or after combination with a compatible pharmaceutical drug.
- acidification employs a pharmaceutically acceptable acid to lower pH.
- Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable acids are well known in the art and include, by way of example only, hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, acetic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, succinic acid, lactic acid, and the like.
- an antioxidant or a chelating agent is added to a bioadhesive polymer prior to formulating it with a drug.
- the antioxidant or chelating agent can be added as a dry material or during wet granulation or following the extrusion or annealing process.
- Antioxidants self-sacrificially stabilize materials against free radicals (for example, free radicals generated from photooxidation as a result of exposure to sunlight).
- the antioxidant and the bioadhesive polymer are preferably maintained in sufficiently close proximity such that a synergistic effect on stability of the polymer is achieved.
- a bioadhesive polymer e.g., a carbidopa-BMA polymer
- an antioxidant can be present in combination with a UV-absorber such as PABA or BHT.
- a UV-absorber such as PABA or BHT.
- These components can be localized such that the UV-absorber is within a single molecule (for example, within a single oligomeric or polymer chain).
- the antioxidant and the UV-absorber can be localized through covalent bonding by reacting (for example, copolymerizing) at least one monomer including or incorporating the antioxidant with at least one monomer including or incorporating the UV-absorber.
- Antioxidants and UV-absorbers can also be conjugated to a suitably reactive polymer.
- Antioxidants, chelating agents and UV-absorbers should be selected such that they do not react with a drug planned to be delivered with the polymer.
- a bioadhesive polymer typically, about 0.1% to about 20% by weight, such as about 0.5% to about 10% or about 1% to about 5%, of antioxidant and/or chelating agent is added to a bioadhesive polymer.
- bioadhesive materials there is no specific limitation on the material that can be encapsulated within the bioadhesive materials. Any kind of therapeutic, prophylactic or diagnostic agent, including organic compounds, inorganic compounds, proteins, polysaccharides, nucleic acids, or other materials can be incorporated using standard techniques. Flavorants, nutraceuticals, and dietary supplements are among the materials that can be incorporated in the bioadhesive material.
- L-3,4-dihydroxyphenyl alanine (“levodopa" or "L-dopa”
- the bioadhesive material may contain carbidopa.
- levodopa and carbidopa are both incorporated in the bioadhesive material.
- the bioadhesive material is a coating on an oral dosage formulation which contains levodopa and carbidopa in separate drug layers.
- useful proteins include hormones such as insulin, growth hormones including somatomedins, transforming growth factors and other growth factors, antigens for oral vaccines, enzymes such as lactase or lipases, and digestive aids such as pancreatin.
- useful drugs include ulcer treatments such as Carafate from Marion Pharmaceuticals, antihypertensives or saluretics such as Metolazone from Searle Pharmaceuticals, carbonic anhydrase inhibitors such as Acetazolamide from Lederle Pharmaceuticals, insulin-like drugs such as glyburide, a blood glucose lowering drug of the sulfonylurea class, hormones such as Android F from Brown Pharmaceuticals and Testred (methyltestosterone) from ICN Pharmaceuticals, and antiparasitics such as mebeandazole (VERMOXTM, Jannsen Pharmaceutical).
- Other drugs for application to the vaginal lining or other mucosal membrane lined orifices such as the rectum include spermacides, yeast or trichomonas treatments and anti-hemorrhoidal treatments.
- Drugs may be classified using the Biopharmaceutical Classification System (BCS), which separates pharmaceuticals for oral administration into four classes depending on their aqueous solubility and their permeability through the intestinal cell layer.
- BCS Biopharmaceutical Classification System
- drug substances are classified as follows:
- Class II drugs are drugs that are particularly insoluble, or slow to dissolve, but that readily are absorbed from solution by the lining of the stomach and/or the intestine. Hence, prolonged exposure to the lining of the GI tract is required to achieve absorption. Such drugs are found in many therapeutic classes.
- Class III and IV drugs are often problematic or unsuitable for sustained release or controlled release.
- Class III and Class IV drugs are characterized by insolubility and poor biomembrane permeability and are commonly delivered parenterally.
- Traditional approaches to parenteral delivery of poorly soluble drugs include using large volumes of aqueous diluents, solubilizing agents, detergents, non-aqueous solvents, or non-physiological pH solutions. These formulations, however, can increase the systemic toxicity of the drug composition or damage body tissues at the site of administration.
- one or more Class I, II, III, or IV drugs are included in a core of a solid oral dosage formulation, and the core is surrounded on at least its circumference by one or more bioadhesive polymers.
- Drugs suitable for use in the invention include caffeine, carbamazepine, fluvastatin, Ketoprofen, Metoprolol, Naproxen, Propranolol, Theophylline, Verapamil, Diltiazem, Gabapentin, Levodopa, Divalproex sodium, itraconazole and its relatives, fluoconazole, terconazole, ketoconazole, and saperconazole, griseofulvin and related compounds such as griseoverdin, some anti malaria drugs (e.g. Atovaquone), immune system modulators (e.g. cyclosporine), cardiovascular drugs (e.g.
- Class III and IV drugs are often problematic or unsuitable for sustained release or controlled release.
- Class III and Class IV drugs are characterized by insolubility and poor biomembrane permeability and are commonly delivered parenterally.
- Traditional approaches to parenteral delivery of poorly soluble drugs include using large volumes of aqueous diluents, solubilizing agents, detergents, non-aqueous solvents, or non-physiological pH solutions. These formulations, however, can increase the systemic toxicity of the drug composition or damage body tissues at the site of administration.
- one or more Class I, II, III, or IV drugs are included in a core of a solid oral dosage formulation, and the core is surrounded on at least its circumference by one or more bioadhesive polymers.
- a radiopaque material such as barium is coated with a bioadhesive material.
- Radioactive materials or magnetic materials could be used in place or, or in addition to, the radiopaque materials.
- the bioadhesive polymer may be used as one or more layers in a bioadhesive drug delivery tablet formulation.
- the formulation is a rate controlled oral dosage formulation (also referred to herein as "BIOROD") in the form of a tablet.
- the bioadhesive drug delivery formulation contains a core, a bioadhesive coating, and optionally an enteric or non-enteric coating.
- the core contains one or more drugs, either alone or with a rate controlling membrane system.
- the core is enveloped on its circumference by a bioadhesive coating.
- the overall shape of the device has been designed to be compatible with swallowing.
- the core (14) is longitudinally compressed to form a capsule-shaped tablet, which is surrounded on its circumference by a bioadhesive polymeric cylinder (12).
- the active agent is in the form of microparticles (16), optionally the microparticles are coated with rate controlling polymers (18).
- the core (14) is encapsulated in a bioadhesive polymeric cylinder (12), where the cylinder contains restricted release openings at the top and bottom of the cylinder (20).
- the core contains multiple drug layers (22 and 24).
- one or more of the drug layers is a controlled release layer, one or more of the layers are immediate release layers, or one of the layers is a controlled release layer while the other layer is an immediate release layer.
- the tablet also contains a third drug layer (26) or a separating layer (26).
- the capsule also contains restricted release openings (not shown in figure).
- the capsule is an osmotic drug delivery system.
- the entire device is coated with a semipermeable membrane, in the preferred embodiment, the membrane is a rigid semipermeable membrane.
- an osmotic BIOROD system contains a core (14), a semi-permeable coating (28) and a bioadhesive polymer cylinder (12).
- the semipermeable membrane is located between the core and the bioadhesive layer.
- the core contains one or more drugs and osmotic agents which pull water across the semi-permeable membrane.
- the capsule contains one or two restricted release openings (20) at the top and/or bottom of the bioadhesive cylinder.
- the osmotic delivery system is a "push-pull" system. Examples of this system are illustrated in FIGS. 6-8 of PCT/US2006/024352.
- the upper chamber contains the drug and is connected to the outside environment via a small exit hole.
- the lower chamber contains a swellable polymer and an osmotic attractant and may have no exit hole. Suitable osmotic agents include sugars and glycols.
- the core contains one layer with an active agent (30), and a second layer with a swellable polymer and osmotic agents (32).
- the polymer layer (32) is a "push layer” since it pushes drug out of the device when it swells at controlled rates.
- the system may contain at least one opening (20), as shown in FIG. 6 of PCT/US2006/024352.
- the active agent (30) is separated from the push layer (32) by an insoluble plug (34) (see FIG. 7 of PCT/US2006/024352).
- FIG. 7 of PCT/US2006/024352 In yet another embodiment illustrated in FIG.
Abstract
Description
Claims
Priority Applications (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
AU2007338631A AU2007338631A1 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2007-12-21 | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders |
CA002673511A CA2673511A1 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2007-12-21 | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders |
EP07863245A EP2063867A2 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2007-12-21 | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders |
US12/448,456 US20100316712A1 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2007-12-21 | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US87707906P | 2006-12-22 | 2006-12-22 | |
US60/877,079 | 2006-12-22 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2008079404A2 true WO2008079404A2 (en) | 2008-07-03 |
WO2008079404A3 WO2008079404A3 (en) | 2009-03-19 |
Family
ID=39563122
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2007/026336 WO2008079404A2 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2007-12-21 | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20100316712A1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP2063867A2 (en) |
AU (1) | AU2007338631A1 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2673511A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2008079404A2 (en) |
Cited By (64)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009129527A2 (en) * | 2008-04-18 | 2009-10-22 | Medtronic, Inc. | Baclofen formulation in a polyorthoester carrier |
WO2010018408A2 (en) * | 2008-08-12 | 2010-02-18 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) Srl | Pharmaceutical compositions |
US7956065B2 (en) | 2008-09-08 | 2011-06-07 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) S.R.L. | Pharmaceutical compounds |
WO2011019956A3 (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2011-10-06 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) S.R.L. | Pharmaceutical compositions with tetrabenazine |
WO2013168021A1 (en) * | 2012-05-07 | 2013-11-14 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for treatment of neuromuscular disorders and neurodegenerative disorders |
US20140212483A1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2014-07-31 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for Treatment of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder |
US20140212461A1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2014-07-31 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods for Treatment of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder |
US9096537B1 (en) | 2014-12-31 | 2015-08-04 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of mucositis |
US9102649B1 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2015-08-11 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9108942B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-08-18 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of moderate to severe pain |
US9150557B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-10-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of hyperglycemia |
US9161911B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2015-10-20 | Depomed, Inc. | Gastric retentive pharmaceutical compositions for treatment and prevention of CNS disorders |
US9175008B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Prodrugs of anti-platelet agents |
US9174931B2 (en) | 2013-06-04 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions for the treatment of diabetes and pre-diabetes |
US9173877B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of local pain |
US9187427B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2015-11-17 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | N-substituted nicotinamide compounds and compositions for the treatment migraine and neurologic diseases |
US9206111B1 (en) | 2014-12-17 | 2015-12-08 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological diseases |
US9227974B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-01-05 | Cellex Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of respiratory disorders |
US9233161B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-01-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological conditions |
US9242939B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-01-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of respiratory disorders |
US9266823B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-02-23 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of parkinson's disease |
US9273061B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-03-01 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of chronic pain |
US9283214B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-03-15 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9284287B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-03-15 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the suppression of carbonic anhydrase activity |
US9290486B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-03-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy |
US9289394B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-03-22 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9303038B2 (en) | 2011-09-06 | 2016-04-05 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy and neurological diseases |
US9309233B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-04-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of blood clotting disorders |
US9315461B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurologic diseases |
US9315478B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9321716B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-04-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9321775B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of moderate to severe pain |
US9333187B1 (en) | 2013-05-15 | 2016-05-10 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory bowel disease |
US9339484B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-05-17 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of restless leg syndrome and fibromyalgia |
US9346742B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-05-24 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of fibromyalgia pain |
US9394288B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-07-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of asthma and allergy |
US9399634B2 (en) | 2012-05-07 | 2016-07-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of depression |
US9403857B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-08-02 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9403826B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-08-02 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory disorders |
US9434729B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-09-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of periodontitis and rheumatoid arthritis |
US9434704B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-09-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological degenerative disorders |
US9492409B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-11-15 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of local pain |
US9498461B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory bowel disease |
US9498447B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-11-22 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9499527B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of familial amyloid polyneuropathy |
US9499526B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurologic diseases |
WO2016190766A1 (en) | 2015-05-26 | 2016-12-01 | Technophage, Investigação E Desenvolvimento Em Biotecnologia, Sa | Compositions for use in treating parkinson's disease and related disorders |
US9522884B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-12-20 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic disorders |
US9573927B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2017-02-21 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of severe pain |
US9580383B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2017-02-28 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9603809B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2017-03-28 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods of treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9624168B2 (en) | 2012-09-06 | 2017-04-18 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment inflammation and lipid disorders |
US9670153B2 (en) | 2012-09-08 | 2017-06-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation and lipid disorders |
US9725404B2 (en) | 2014-10-27 | 2017-08-08 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9738631B2 (en) | 2012-05-07 | 2017-08-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological disorders |
US9765020B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2017-09-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Dichlorophenyl-imino compounds and compositions, and methods for the treatment of mucositis |
US9771355B2 (en) | 2014-09-26 | 2017-09-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy and neurological disorders |
US9932294B2 (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2018-04-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US10150792B2 (en) | 2010-11-08 | 2018-12-11 | Synthonics, Inc. | Bismuth-containing compounds, coordination polymers, methods for modulating pharmacokinetic properties of biologically active agents, and methods for treating patients |
US10208014B2 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2019-02-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological disorders |
US10227301B2 (en) | 2015-01-06 | 2019-03-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation and pain |
US10292937B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2019-05-21 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods of treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10905652B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2021-02-02 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US11241392B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2022-02-08 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
Families Citing this family (43)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7776314B2 (en) | 2002-06-17 | 2010-08-17 | Grunenthal Gmbh | Abuse-proofed dosage system |
DE102005005446A1 (en) | 2005-02-04 | 2006-08-10 | Grünenthal GmbH | Break-resistant dosage forms with sustained release |
DE10361596A1 (en) | 2003-12-24 | 2005-09-29 | Grünenthal GmbH | Process for producing an anti-abuse dosage form |
DE102004032049A1 (en) | 2004-07-01 | 2006-01-19 | Grünenthal GmbH | Anti-abuse, oral dosage form |
DE102005005449A1 (en) | 2005-02-04 | 2006-08-10 | Grünenthal GmbH | Process for producing an anti-abuse dosage form |
ES2560210T3 (en) | 2009-07-22 | 2016-02-17 | Grünenthal GmbH | Tamper-resistant dosage form for oxidation-sensitive opiates |
RU2604676C2 (en) | 2010-09-02 | 2016-12-10 | Грюненталь Гмбх | Destruction-resistant dosage form containing an inorganic salt |
AR087359A1 (en) | 2011-07-29 | 2014-03-19 | Gruenenthal Gmbh | TEST ALTERATION TABLET PROVIDING IMMEDIATE RELEASE OF THE PHARMACO |
WO2013017234A1 (en) | 2011-07-29 | 2013-02-07 | Grünenthal GmbH | Tamper-resistant tablet providing immediate drug release |
US20130202656A1 (en) | 2012-02-03 | 2013-08-08 | Dynasil Biomedical Corporation | Systems and kits for the fabrication of tissue patches |
GB201204579D0 (en) * | 2012-03-15 | 2012-05-02 | Univ Nottingham Trent | Coating metal oxide particles |
ES2692944T3 (en) | 2012-04-18 | 2018-12-05 | Grünenthal GmbH | Pharmaceutical dosage form resistant to handling and resistant to rapid discharge of the dose |
WO2013184646A2 (en) * | 2012-06-05 | 2013-12-12 | Synagile Corporation | Dosing regimens for subcutaneously infusible acidic compositions |
CA2870170C (en) | 2012-09-12 | 2018-06-12 | Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. | Adhesive stent coating for anti-migration |
EP2914249B1 (en) * | 2012-11-02 | 2020-06-17 | Teikoku Seiyaku Co., Ltd. | Propynylaminoindan transdermal compositions |
US8545878B1 (en) * | 2012-11-09 | 2013-10-01 | Civitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Capsules containing high doses of levodopa for pulmonary use |
WO2014074797A1 (en) | 2012-11-09 | 2014-05-15 | Civitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Ultra low density pulmonary powders |
BR112015014957A2 (en) * | 2012-12-21 | 2017-07-11 | Map Pharmaceuticals Inc | fluoroergoline derivatives and uses thereof |
EA032465B1 (en) | 2013-07-12 | 2019-05-31 | Грюненталь Гмбх | Tamper-resistant oral pharmaceutical dosage form containing ethylene-vinyl acetate polymer and process for the production thereof |
WO2015020676A1 (en) | 2013-08-08 | 2015-02-12 | Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. | Dissolvable or degradable adhesive polymer to prevent stent migration |
WO2015078891A1 (en) | 2013-11-26 | 2015-06-04 | Farmaceutici Formenti S.P.A. | Preparation of a powdery pharmaceutical composition by means of cryo-milling |
CR20160395A (en) | 2014-02-13 | 2016-12-20 | Incyte Corp | CYCLOPROPILAMINS AS INHIBITORS OF LSD1 |
KR102421235B1 (en) | 2014-02-13 | 2022-07-15 | 인사이트 코포레이션 | Cyclopropylamines as lsd1 inhibitors |
US10836089B2 (en) * | 2014-02-20 | 2020-11-17 | Guill Tool & Engineering Co., Inc. | Multicomponent approach to standard and microlayer coextrusion |
CA2951909C (en) * | 2014-06-11 | 2022-08-16 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Self-assembled residence devices and related methods |
US9695167B2 (en) | 2014-07-10 | 2017-07-04 | Incyte Corporation | Substituted triazolo[1,5-a]pyridines and triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazines as LSD1 inhibitors |
CA2936746C (en) | 2014-10-31 | 2017-06-27 | Purdue Pharma | Methods and compositions particularly for treatment of attention deficit disorder |
EP3277689B1 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2019-09-04 | Incyte Corporation | Heterocyclic compounds as lsd1 inhibitors |
CA2984494A1 (en) | 2015-05-06 | 2016-11-10 | Synagile Corporation | Pharmaceutical suspensions containing drug particles, devices for their administration, and methods of their use |
EP3331577A4 (en) | 2015-08-07 | 2019-07-17 | Xcede Technologies, Inc. | Adhesive compositions and related methods |
US9540548B1 (en) | 2015-08-07 | 2017-01-10 | Xcede Technologies, Inc. | Adhesive compositions and related methods |
US9833538B2 (en) | 2015-08-07 | 2017-12-05 | Xcede Technologies, Inc. | Adhesive compositions and related methods |
BR112018002553A8 (en) | 2015-08-12 | 2023-01-24 | Incyte Corp | SALTS OF AN LSD1 INHIBITOR |
CA2998259A1 (en) | 2015-09-10 | 2017-03-16 | Grunenthal Gmbh | Protecting oral overdose with abuse deterrent immediate release formulations |
US11576859B2 (en) | 2015-10-23 | 2023-02-14 | Lyndra Therapeutics, Inc. | Gastric residence systems for sustained release of therapeutic agents and methods of use thereof |
US20190290587A1 (en) * | 2016-07-11 | 2019-09-26 | Contera Pharma Aps | Pulsatile drug delivery system for treating morning akinesia |
JP2019532947A (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2019-11-14 | リンドラ,インコーポレイティド | Gastric retention system for sustained delivery of adamantane drugs |
US20190054051A1 (en) * | 2017-08-21 | 2019-02-21 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | DOPA Formulations for Treatments of Parkinson's Disease |
CA3110202A1 (en) * | 2018-08-23 | 2020-02-27 | Sunovion Pharmaceuticals Inc. | Acid addition salts of apomorphine, pharmaceutical compositions containing the same, and methods of using the same |
US10968200B2 (en) | 2018-08-31 | 2021-04-06 | Incyte Corporation | Salts of an LSD1 inhibitor and processes for preparing the same |
JP2022508714A (en) | 2018-10-15 | 2022-01-19 | アプレシア・ファーマスーティカルズ・エルエルシー | Methods and systems for forming dosage forms in packaging |
US10722473B2 (en) | 2018-11-19 | 2020-07-28 | Purdue Pharma L.P. | Methods and compositions particularly for treatment of attention deficit disorder |
CN115666544A (en) * | 2020-04-15 | 2023-01-31 | 阿普雷奇亚制药有限责任公司 | Multi-component packaged dosage form and method |
Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5607969A (en) * | 1992-12-24 | 1997-03-04 | Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem | L-DOPA ethyl ester to treat Parkinson's disease |
US6166081A (en) * | 1997-10-09 | 2000-12-26 | Kushnir; Moshe | Methods and apparatus for treatment of Parkinson's disease |
US6365187B2 (en) * | 1992-04-24 | 2002-04-02 | Brown University Research Foundation | Bioadhesive microspheres and their use as drug delivery and imaging systems |
US20040167216A1 (en) * | 2002-12-06 | 2004-08-26 | Jia-Ning Xiang | Carbidopa prodrugs and derivatives, and compositions and uses thereof |
WO2006026556A2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2006-03-09 | Spherics, Inc. | Bioadhesive rate-controlled oral dosage formulations |
WO2006039022A2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2006-04-13 | Spherics, Inc. | Controlled regional oral delivery |
WO2007002516A2 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2007-01-04 | Spherics, Inc. | Improved dosage forms for movement disorder treatment |
WO2008002471A2 (en) * | 2006-06-23 | 2008-01-03 | Spherics, Inc. | Erosion-stabilized bioadhesive polymers functionalized or blended with catechol and derivatives thereof |
Family Cites Families (54)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE3779500T2 (en) * | 1986-06-10 | 1993-01-21 | Chiesi Farma Spa | LEVODOPA METHYL ESTER CONTAINING PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS, THEIR PRODUCTION AND THERAPEUTIC USE. |
ZA889189B (en) * | 1986-06-16 | 1989-08-30 | Merck & Co Inc | Controlled release combination of carbidopa/levodopa |
US4832957A (en) * | 1987-12-11 | 1989-05-23 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Controlled release combination of carbidopa/levodopa |
US4983400A (en) * | 1986-06-16 | 1991-01-08 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Controlled release combination of carbidopa/levodopa |
SE460947B (en) * | 1986-08-26 | 1989-12-11 | Lejus Medical Ab | A MULTIPLE-UNIT DOS COMPOSITION OF L-DOPA |
FI864875A0 (en) * | 1986-11-28 | 1986-11-28 | Orion Yhtymae Oy | NYA FARMAKOLOGISKT AKTIVA FOERENINGAR, DESSA INNEHAOLLANDE KOMPOSITIONER SAMT FOERFARANDE OCH MELLANPRODUKTER FOER ANVAENDNING VID FRAMSTAELLNING AV DESSA. |
US5133974A (en) * | 1989-05-05 | 1992-07-28 | Kv Pharmaceutical Company | Extended release pharmaceutical formulations |
DK469989D0 (en) * | 1989-09-22 | 1989-09-22 | Bukh Meditec | PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATION |
GB2238047B (en) * | 1989-11-03 | 1993-02-10 | Orion Yhtymae Oy | Stable polymorphic form of (e)-n,n-diethyl-2-cyano-3-(3,4-dihydroxy-5-nitrophenyl)acrylamide and the process for its preparation |
US5221536A (en) * | 1990-05-07 | 1993-06-22 | Alza Corporation | Dosage form indicated for the management of abnormal posture, tremor and involuntary movement |
US5190763A (en) * | 1990-05-07 | 1993-03-02 | Alza Corporation | Dosage form indicated for the management of abnormal posture, tremor and involuntary movement |
US5192550A (en) * | 1990-05-07 | 1993-03-09 | Alza Corporation | Dosage form for treating central nervous system disorders |
US5057321A (en) * | 1990-06-13 | 1991-10-15 | Alza Corporation | Dosage form comprising drug and maltodextrin |
US5624960A (en) * | 1991-01-23 | 1997-04-29 | Isis Pharma Gmbh | Orally administrable drugs for the treatment of central dopamine deficiency conditions |
DE4101873C2 (en) * | 1991-01-23 | 1993-12-09 | Isis Pharma Gmbh | Orally administrable drug form for the treatment of central dopamine deficiency states |
US5266332A (en) * | 1991-12-06 | 1993-11-30 | Alza Corporation | Method for administering anti-Parkinson drug |
US5869097A (en) * | 1992-11-02 | 1999-02-09 | Alza Corporation | Method of therapy comprising an osmotic caplet |
US5534263A (en) * | 1995-02-24 | 1996-07-09 | Alza Corporation | Active agent dosage form comprising a matrix and at least two insoluble bands |
US6117453A (en) * | 1995-04-14 | 2000-09-12 | Pharma Pass | Solid compositions containing polyethylene oxide and an active ingredient |
US5840756A (en) * | 1995-07-21 | 1998-11-24 | Teva Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd. | Pharmaceutical composition of L-DOPA ester |
IT1282576B1 (en) * | 1996-02-06 | 1998-03-31 | Jagotec Ag | PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET SUITABLE TO GIVE THE ACTIVE SUBSTANCE IN SUBSEQUENT AND PREDETERMINABLE TIMES |
IT1282650B1 (en) * | 1996-02-19 | 1998-03-31 | Jagotec Ag | PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET, CHARACTERIZED BY A HIGH INCREASE IN VOLUME IN CONTACT WITH BIOLOGICAL LIQUIDS |
US6929801B2 (en) * | 1996-02-19 | 2005-08-16 | Acrux Dds Pty Ltd | Transdermal delivery of antiparkinson agents |
US5788987A (en) * | 1997-01-29 | 1998-08-04 | Poli Industria Chimica Spa | Methods for treating early morning pathologies |
US6756056B2 (en) * | 1997-04-08 | 2004-06-29 | Alan A. Rubin | Treatment of Parkinson's disease and related disorders by novel formulations of the combination carbidopa-levodopa |
IT1293764B1 (en) * | 1997-07-23 | 1999-03-10 | Chiesi Farma Spa | PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS IN THE FORM OF EFFERVESCENT TABLETS CONTAINING AN UNSTABLE ACTIVE IN THE PRESENCE OF WATER |
US6607751B1 (en) * | 1997-10-10 | 2003-08-19 | Intellipharamaceutics Corp. | Controlled release delivery device for pharmaceutical agents incorporating microbial polysaccharide gum |
US6287594B1 (en) * | 1998-01-20 | 2001-09-11 | Edward S. Wilson | Oral liquid compositions |
US6365180B1 (en) * | 1998-01-20 | 2002-04-02 | Glenn A. Meyer | Oral liquid compositions |
FR2777781B1 (en) * | 1998-04-24 | 2004-04-09 | Rhone Poulenc Rorer Sa | RILUZOLE AND L-DOPA ASSOCIATIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF PARKINSON'S DISEASE |
US5945424A (en) * | 1998-07-31 | 1999-08-31 | G & H Associates, Inc. | Treatment of periodic limb movement syndrome |
CA2350304A1 (en) * | 1998-11-10 | 2000-05-18 | Teva Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd. | Dispersible compositions containing l-dopa ethyl ester |
FI109453B (en) * | 1999-06-30 | 2002-08-15 | Orion Yhtymae Oyj | Pharmaceutical composition |
JP2003505348A (en) * | 1999-07-16 | 2003-02-12 | マキシム ファーマシューティカルス,インコーポレイテッド | Activation and protection of cytotoxic lymphocytes using reactive oxygen metabolite inhibitors |
US6627223B2 (en) * | 2000-02-11 | 2003-09-30 | Eurand Pharmaceuticals Ltd. | Timed pulsatile drug delivery systems |
US7674480B2 (en) * | 2000-06-23 | 2010-03-09 | Teva Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd. | Rapidly expanding composition for gastric retention and controlled release of therapeutic agents, and dosage forms including the composition |
US6514482B1 (en) * | 2000-09-19 | 2003-02-04 | Advanced Inhalation Research, Inc. | Pulmonary delivery in treating disorders of the central nervous system |
US20020111384A1 (en) * | 2000-10-16 | 2002-08-15 | Boudrie Vickie L. | Method of treating alzheimer's disease |
US20030045539A1 (en) * | 2000-11-06 | 2003-03-06 | Baltazar Gomez-Mancilla | Cabergoline and pramipexole: new uses and combinations |
ATE380022T1 (en) * | 2001-01-31 | 2007-12-15 | Evonik Roehm Gmbh | MULTIPARTICULAR MEDICINAL FORM CONTAINING AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENTLY COATED PELLET FORMS |
US6531153B2 (en) * | 2001-05-29 | 2003-03-11 | Drugtech Corporation | Composition with sustained release of levodopa and carbidopa |
US20040028613A1 (en) * | 2001-06-25 | 2004-02-12 | Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc | Dopamine agonist formulations for enhanced central nervous system delivery |
IL159813A0 (en) * | 2001-07-12 | 2004-06-20 | Teva Pharma | Dual release formulation comprising levodopa ethyl ester and a decarboxylase inhibitor in immediate release layer with levodopa ethyl ester and a decarboxylase inhibitor in a controlled release core |
IL159812A0 (en) * | 2001-07-12 | 2004-06-20 | Teva Pharma | Dual release formulation comprising levodopa ethyl ester and a decarboxylase inhibitor in immediate release layer with levodopa ethyl ester in a controlled release core |
WO2003051304A2 (en) * | 2001-12-15 | 2003-06-26 | Spherics, Inc. | Bioadhesive drug delivery system with enhanced gastric retention |
IL162459A0 (en) * | 2001-12-24 | 2005-11-20 | Teva Pharma | Dosage form with a core table of active ingredientsheathed in a compressed annular body of powder o r granular material, and process and toolin |
US20040052843A1 (en) * | 2001-12-24 | 2004-03-18 | Lerner E. Itzhak | Controlled release dosage forms |
US20030224045A1 (en) * | 2002-05-29 | 2003-12-04 | Chien-Hsuan Han | Combination immediate release sustained release levodopa/carbidopa dosage forms |
US20040166159A1 (en) * | 2002-05-29 | 2004-08-26 | Chien-Hsuan Han | Pharmaceutical dosage forms having immediate and controlled release properties that contain an aromatic amino acid decarboxylase inhibitor and levodopa |
US7094427B2 (en) * | 2002-05-29 | 2006-08-22 | Impax Laboratories, Inc. | Combination immediate release controlled release levodopa/carbidopa dosage forms |
US20040180086A1 (en) * | 2002-10-11 | 2004-09-16 | Zebunnissa Ramtoola | Gastro-retentive levodopa delivery form |
WO2005023185A2 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-03-17 | Transform Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Pharmaceutical compositions and method of using levodopa and carbidopa |
JP4971159B2 (en) * | 2004-08-13 | 2012-07-11 | ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング | Sustained release pellet preparation containing pramipexole or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, its production method and use |
AR055106A1 (en) * | 2005-08-05 | 2007-08-08 | Osmotica Pharmaceutical Argent | SOLID PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION OF EXTENDED LIBERATION CONTAINING CARBIDOPA AND LEVODOPA |
-
2007
- 2007-12-21 WO PCT/US2007/026336 patent/WO2008079404A2/en active Application Filing
- 2007-12-21 US US12/448,456 patent/US20100316712A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-12-21 CA CA002673511A patent/CA2673511A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-12-21 AU AU2007338631A patent/AU2007338631A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-12-21 EP EP07863245A patent/EP2063867A2/en not_active Withdrawn
Patent Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6365187B2 (en) * | 1992-04-24 | 2002-04-02 | Brown University Research Foundation | Bioadhesive microspheres and their use as drug delivery and imaging systems |
US5607969A (en) * | 1992-12-24 | 1997-03-04 | Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem | L-DOPA ethyl ester to treat Parkinson's disease |
US6166081A (en) * | 1997-10-09 | 2000-12-26 | Kushnir; Moshe | Methods and apparatus for treatment of Parkinson's disease |
US20040167216A1 (en) * | 2002-12-06 | 2004-08-26 | Jia-Ning Xiang | Carbidopa prodrugs and derivatives, and compositions and uses thereof |
WO2006026556A2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2006-03-09 | Spherics, Inc. | Bioadhesive rate-controlled oral dosage formulations |
WO2006039022A2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2006-04-13 | Spherics, Inc. | Controlled regional oral delivery |
WO2007002516A2 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2007-01-04 | Spherics, Inc. | Improved dosage forms for movement disorder treatment |
WO2008002471A2 (en) * | 2006-06-23 | 2008-01-03 | Spherics, Inc. | Erosion-stabilized bioadhesive polymers functionalized or blended with catechol and derivatives thereof |
Cited By (85)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009129527A3 (en) * | 2008-04-18 | 2009-12-10 | Medtronic, Inc. | Baclofen formulation in a polyorthoester carrier |
WO2009129527A2 (en) * | 2008-04-18 | 2009-10-22 | Medtronic, Inc. | Baclofen formulation in a polyorthoester carrier |
WO2010018408A2 (en) * | 2008-08-12 | 2010-02-18 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) Srl | Pharmaceutical compositions |
WO2010018408A3 (en) * | 2008-08-12 | 2010-11-25 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) Srl | Pharmaceutical compositions with tetrabenazine |
US9161911B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2015-10-20 | Depomed, Inc. | Gastric retentive pharmaceutical compositions for treatment and prevention of CNS disorders |
US9566258B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2017-02-14 | Depomed, Inc. | Gastric retentive pharmaceutical compositions for treatment and prevention of CNS disorders |
US9937142B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2018-04-10 | Depomed, Inc. | Gastric retentive pharmaceutical compositions for treatment and prevention of CNS disorders |
US7956065B2 (en) | 2008-09-08 | 2011-06-07 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) S.R.L. | Pharmaceutical compounds |
WO2011019956A3 (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2011-10-06 | Biovail Laboratories International (Barbados) S.R.L. | Pharmaceutical compositions with tetrabenazine |
JP2013501810A (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2013-01-17 | ヴァリーント インターナショナル(バルバドス)エスアールエル | Pharmaceutical composition |
US10150792B2 (en) | 2010-11-08 | 2018-12-11 | Synthonics, Inc. | Bismuth-containing compounds, coordination polymers, methods for modulating pharmacokinetic properties of biologically active agents, and methods for treating patients |
US9289394B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-03-22 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9498447B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-11-22 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US11241391B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2022-02-08 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US11241392B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2022-02-08 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10905652B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2021-02-02 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US8927010B2 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2015-01-06 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10881618B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2021-01-05 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10617651B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2020-04-14 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10292937B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2019-05-21 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods of treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US8916588B2 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2014-12-23 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10182995B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2019-01-22 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9511032B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-12-06 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9603808B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2017-03-28 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Method of treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9603809B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2017-03-28 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods of treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9889095B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2018-02-13 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US11911518B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2024-02-27 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US9283214B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2016-03-15 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US10179108B2 (en) | 2011-03-23 | 2019-01-15 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder |
US20140212461A1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2014-07-31 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Methods for Treatment of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder |
US20140212483A1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2014-07-31 | Ironshore Pharmaceuticals & Development, Inc. | Compositions for Treatment of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder |
US9303038B2 (en) | 2011-09-06 | 2016-04-05 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy and neurological diseases |
WO2013168021A1 (en) * | 2012-05-07 | 2013-11-14 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for treatment of neuromuscular disorders and neurodegenerative disorders |
US9642915B2 (en) | 2012-05-07 | 2017-05-09 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neuromuscular disorders and neurodegenerative diseases |
US9399634B2 (en) | 2012-05-07 | 2016-07-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of depression |
US9738631B2 (en) | 2012-05-07 | 2017-08-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological disorders |
US9522884B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-12-20 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic disorders |
US9309233B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-04-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of blood clotting disorders |
US9266823B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-02-23 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of parkinson's disease |
US9434704B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-09-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological degenerative disorders |
US9403826B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-08-02 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory disorders |
US9321775B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of moderate to severe pain |
US9499527B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of familial amyloid polyneuropathy |
US9403857B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-08-02 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9394288B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-07-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of asthma and allergy |
US9233161B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-01-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological conditions |
US9346742B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-05-24 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of fibromyalgia pain |
US9242939B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-01-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of respiratory disorders |
US9573927B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2017-02-21 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of severe pain |
US9339484B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-05-17 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of restless leg syndrome and fibromyalgia |
US9273061B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-03-01 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of chronic pain |
US9499526B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurologic diseases |
US9315461B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurologic diseases |
US9315478B2 (en) | 2012-05-10 | 2016-04-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9765020B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2017-09-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Dichlorophenyl-imino compounds and compositions, and methods for the treatment of mucositis |
US9498461B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-11-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory bowel disease |
US9580383B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2017-02-28 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9492409B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-11-15 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of local pain |
US9434729B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-09-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of periodontitis and rheumatoid arthritis |
US9227974B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2016-01-05 | Cellex Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of respiratory disorders |
US9403793B2 (en) | 2012-07-03 | 2016-08-02 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of moderate to severe pain |
US9187427B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2015-11-17 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | N-substituted nicotinamide compounds and compositions for the treatment migraine and neurologic diseases |
US9624168B2 (en) | 2012-09-06 | 2017-04-18 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment inflammation and lipid disorders |
US9670153B2 (en) | 2012-09-08 | 2017-06-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation and lipid disorders |
US9333187B1 (en) | 2013-05-15 | 2016-05-10 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammatory bowel disease |
US9174931B2 (en) | 2013-06-04 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions for the treatment of diabetes and pre-diabetes |
US9840472B2 (en) | 2013-12-07 | 2017-12-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of mucositis |
US9771355B2 (en) | 2014-09-26 | 2017-09-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy and neurological disorders |
US9988340B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2018-06-05 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9102649B1 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2015-08-11 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9725404B2 (en) | 2014-10-27 | 2017-08-08 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9290486B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-03-22 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of epilepsy |
US9150557B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-10-06 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of hyperglycemia |
US9284287B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-03-15 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the suppression of carbonic anhydrase activity |
US9108942B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-08-18 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of moderate to severe pain |
US10208014B2 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2019-02-19 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological disorders |
US9321716B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2016-04-26 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of metabolic syndrome |
US9173877B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of local pain |
US9175008B1 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2015-11-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Prodrugs of anti-platelet agents |
US9932294B2 (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2018-04-03 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of multiple sclerosis |
US9206111B1 (en) | 2014-12-17 | 2015-12-08 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of neurological diseases |
US9096537B1 (en) | 2014-12-31 | 2015-08-04 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of mucositis |
US10343994B2 (en) | 2015-01-06 | 2019-07-09 | Mahesh Kandula | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation and pain |
US10227301B2 (en) | 2015-01-06 | 2019-03-12 | Cellix Bio Private Limited | Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation and pain |
WO2016190766A1 (en) | 2015-05-26 | 2016-12-01 | Technophage, Investigação E Desenvolvimento Em Biotecnologia, Sa | Compositions for use in treating parkinson's disease and related disorders |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
AU2007338631A1 (en) | 2008-07-03 |
WO2008079404A3 (en) | 2009-03-19 |
CA2673511A1 (en) | 2008-07-03 |
US20100316712A1 (en) | 2010-12-16 |
EP2063867A2 (en) | 2009-06-03 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20100316712A1 (en) | Pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of parkinson's disease and related disorders | |
US20070003621A1 (en) | Dosage forms for movement disorder treatment | |
US20080131492A1 (en) | Dosage forms for movement disorder treatment | |
US9744137B2 (en) | Topiramate compositions and methods of enhancing its bioavailability | |
RU2385712C2 (en) | Controlled-release formulation | |
CA2613107A1 (en) | Delayed release or extended-delayed release dosage forms of pramipexole | |
US20080260824A1 (en) | Bioadhesive Rate-Controlled Oral Dosage Formulations | |
AU2001268722B2 (en) | Rapidly expanding composition for gastric retention and controlled release of therapeutic agents, and dosage forms including the composition | |
US6632451B2 (en) | Delayed total release two pulse gastrointestinal drug delivery system | |
WO2007103286A2 (en) | Rate-controlled bioadhesive oral dosage formulations | |
US7674480B2 (en) | Rapidly expanding composition for gastric retention and controlled release of therapeutic agents, and dosage forms including the composition | |
ES2606463T3 (en) | Combination of levodopa / carbidopa immediate release and controlled release dosage forms | |
US20070281007A1 (en) | Mucoadhesive Oral Formulations of High Permeability, High Solubility Drugs | |
US8491929B2 (en) | Bioadhesive polymers | |
US20060045865A1 (en) | Controlled regional oral delivery | |
US20130224292A1 (en) | Acamprosate formulations, methods of using the same, and combinations comprising the same | |
WO2007106957A1 (en) | Multiple units controlled-release floating dosage forms | |
US20080311191A1 (en) | Multi-Layer Tablets and Bioadhesive Dosage Forms | |
US20150250746A1 (en) | Acamprosate formulations, methods of using the same, and combinations comprising the same | |
PL207776B1 (en) | Modified release pharmaceutical composition | |
WO2006026556A2 (en) | Bioadhesive rate-controlled oral dosage formulations | |
CN104379138B (en) | Acamprosate formulations, methods of use thereof, and combinations comprising acamprosate formulations | |
CN111629714A (en) | Perforated capsule | |
Sreekanth | Formulation and Evaluation of Nizatiding Floatince Table. | |
SI21349A (en) | Floating pharmaceutical form with adjusted release of drug's active ingredient |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2007863245 Country of ref document: EP |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 07863245 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A2 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2673511 Country of ref document: CA |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2007338631 Country of ref document: AU |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2007338631 Country of ref document: AU Date of ref document: 20071221 Kind code of ref document: A |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 12448456 Country of ref document: US |